Failure detection and recovery for multiple active resources

ABSTRACT

Wireless communications using multiple active resources (e.g., bandwidth parts (BWPs)) are described. A wireless device may perform failure event detection, such as radio link monitoring (RLM) and/or beam failure detection (BFD), jointly or separately for multiple active resources (e.g., BWPs) based on one or more criteria.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.62/674,127, titled “Radio Link Monitoring with Multiple Active BandwidthParts” and filed on May 21, 2018; and U.S. Provisional Application No.62/675,721, titled “Beam Failure Recovery in Multiple Active BandwidthParts” and filed on May 23, 2018. Each of the above-referencedapplications is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

Wireless communications may use bandwidth parts (BWPs) and/or otherwireless resources. A wireless device may perform failure eventdetection and/or failure recovery, such as radio link monitoring (RLM),radio link failure (RLF), and/or beam failure detection (BFD), todetermine a failure event on an active resource (e.g., an active BWP).Performing failure event detection and/or recovery for multiple activeresources (e.g., multiple active BWPs) may cause various problems suchas excessive power consumption of the wireless device and/or increasedinterference. Performing failure event detection and/or recovery foronly one (or fewer than all) of multiple active resources may reduceaccuracy of failure event detection and/or recovery.

SUMMARY

The following summary presents a simplified summary of certain features.The summary is not an extensive overview and is not intended to identifykey or critical elements.

Wireless communications for failure event detection and/or recoveryusing multiple active resources (e.g., multiple active BWPs) aredescribed. A wireless device may perform failure event detection and/orrecovery, such as RLM and/or BFD, for multiple active resources (e.g.,multiple active BWPs). The wireless device may perform failure eventdetection and/or recovery for multiple active resources separatelyand/or jointly, based on one or more criteria and/or set(s) of resourcesassociated with the multiple active resources, to provide improvedfailure event detection and/or recovery with reduced power consumptionand/or increased accuracy.

These and other features and advantages are described in greater detailbelow.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Some features are shown by way of example, and not by limitation, in theaccompanying drawings. In the drawings, like numerals reference similarelements.

FIG. 1 shows an example radio access network (RAN) architecture.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane protocol stack.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane protocol stack.

FIG. 3 shows an example wireless device and two base stations.

FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, and FIG. 4D show examples of uplink anddownlink signal transmission.

FIG. 5A shows an example uplink channel mapping and example uplinkphysical signals.

FIG. 5B shows an example downlink channel mapping and example downlinkphysical signals.

FIG. 6 shows an example transmission time and/or reception time for acarrier.

FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B show example sets of orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) subcarriers.

FIG. 8 shows example OFDM radio resources.

FIG. 9A shows an example channel state information reference signal(CSI-RS) and/or synchronization signal (SS) block transmission in amulti-beam system.

FIG. 9B shows an example downlink beam management procedure.

FIG. 10 shows an example of configured bandwidth parts (BWPs).

FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B show examples of multi connectivity.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a random access procedure.

FIG. 13 shows example medium access control (MAC) entities.

FIG. 14 shows an example RAN architecture.

FIG. 15 shows example radio resource control (RRC) states.

FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B and FIG. 16C show examples of MAC subheaders.

FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B show examples of MAC PDUs.

FIG. 18 shows an example of LCIDs for DL-SCH.

FIG. 19 shows an example of LCIDs for UL-SCH.

FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B show examples of SCell Activation/Deactivation MACCE.

FIG. 21 shows an example of BWP operation.

FIG. 22 shows an example of BWP operation in an SCell.

FIG. 23A, FIG. 23B and FIG. 23C show examples of multiple active BWPsoperation.

FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of BWP scheduling.

FIG. 25A, FIG. 25B, FIG. 25C and FIG. 25D show examples of multipleactive BWPs operation.

FIG. 26A, FIG. 26B, and FIG. 26C show examples of multiple active BWPsoperation.

FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 27C, and FIG. 27D show examples of a MAC CE anda corresponding MAC subheader for BWP activation/deactivation.

FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B show examples of one or more fields of DCI formultiple active BWP operation indication.

FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B show examples of one or more fields of DCI formultiple active BWP operation indication.

FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B show examples of one or more fields of DCI formultiple active BWP operation indication.

FIG. 31 shows an example configuration of bandwidth parts (BWPs) andcorresponding sets of resources for failure event detection.

FIG. 32 shows an example of performing failure event detection on anactive BWP.

FIG. 33 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for failure event detection.

FIG. 34 shows an example of performing failure event detection on two ormore active BWPs separately.

FIG. 35 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for failure event detection.

FIG. 36 shows an example of performing failure event detection on two ormore active BWPs jointly.

FIG. 37 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for failure event detection.

FIG. 38 shows an example of performing failure event detection on aselected active BWP.

FIG. 39 shows an example method of determining a failure event.

FIG. 40 shows an example method for a wireless device determining afailure event.

FIG. 41 shows an example configuration of BWPs and corresponding sets ofresources for radio link monitoring (RLM).

FIG. 42 shows an example of performing RLM on an active BWP.

FIG. 43 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for RLM.

FIG. 44 shows an example of performing RLM on two or more active BWPsseparately.

FIG. 45 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for RLM.

FIG. 46 shows an example of performing RLM on two or more active BWPsjointly.

FIG. 47 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for RLM.

FIG. 48 shows an example of performing RLM on a selected active BWP.

FIG. 49 shows an example method for determining a radio link failure(RLF).

FIG. 50 shows an example method for a wireless device determining a RLF.

FIG. 51 shows an example configuration of BWPs and corresponding sets ofresources for beam failure detection (BFD).

FIG. 52 shows an example of performing BFD on an active BWP.

FIG. 53 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for BFD.

FIG. 54 shows an example of performing BFD on two or more active BWPsseparately.

FIG. 55 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for BFD.

FIG. 56 shows an example of performing BFD jointly on two or more activeBWPs.

FIG. 57 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for BFD.

FIG. 58 shows an example of performing BFD on a selected active BWP.

FIG. 59 shows an example method for determining a beam failure.

FIG. 60 shows an example method for a wireless device determining a beamfailure.

FIG. 61 shows example elements of a computing device that may be used toimplement any of the various devices described herein.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The accompanying drawings and descriptions provide examples. It is to beunderstood that the examples shown in the drawings and/or described arenon-exclusive and that there are other examples of how features shownand described may be practiced.

Examples are provided for operation of wireless communication systemswhich may be used in the technical field of multicarrier communicationsystems. More particularly, the technology described herein may relateto multiple active bandwidth parts in multicarrier communicationsystems.

The following acronyms are used throughout the drawings and/ordescriptions, and are provided below for convenience although otheracronyms may be introduced in the detailed description:

-   3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project-   5GC 5G Core Network-   ACK Acknowledgement-   AMF Access and Mobility Management Function-   ARQ Automatic Repeat Request-   AS Access Stratum-   ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit-   BA Bandwidth Adaptation-   BCCH Broadcast Control Channel-   BCH Broadcast Channel-   BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying-   BWP Bandwidth Part-   CA Carrier Aggregation-   CC Component Carrier-   CCCH Common Control CHannel-   CDMA Code Division Multiple Access-   CN Core Network-   CP Cyclic Prefix-   CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex-   C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier-   CS Configured Scheduling-   CSI Channel State Information-   CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal-   CQI Channel Quality Indicator-   CSS Common Search Space-   CU Central Unit-   DC Dual Connectivity-   DCCH Dedicated Control Channel-   DCI Downlink Control Information-   DL Downlink-   DL-SCH Downlink Shared CHannel-   DM-RS DeModulation Reference Signal-   DRB Data Radio Bearer-   DRX Discontinuous Reception-   DTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel-   DU Distributed Unit-   EPC Evolved Packet Core-   E-UTRA Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access-   E-UTRAN Evolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network-   FDD Frequency Division Duplex-   FPGA Field Programmable Gate Arrays-   F1-C F1-Control plane-   F1-U F1-User plane-   gNB next generation Node B-   HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest-   HDL Hardware Description Languages-   IE Information Element-   IP Internet Protocol-   LCID Logical Channel Identifier-   LTE Long Term Evolution-   MAC Media Access Control-   MCG Master Cell Group-   MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme-   MeNB Master evolved Node B-   MIB Master Information Block-   MME Mobility Management Entity-   MN Master Node-   NACK Negative Acknowledgement-   NAS Non-Access Stratum-   NG CP Next Generation Control Plane-   NGC Next Generation Core-   NG-C NG-Control plane-   ng-eNB next generation evolved Node B-   NG-U NG-User plane-   NR New Radio-   NR MAC New Radio MAC-   NR PDCP New Radio PDCP-   NR PHY New Radio PHYsical-   NR RLC New Radio RLC-   NR RRC New Radio RRC-   NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information-   O&M Operation and Maintenance-   OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing-   PBCH Physical Broadcast CHannel-   PCC Primary Component Carrier-   PCCH Paging Control CHannel-   PCell Primary Cell-   PCH Paging CHannel-   PDCCH Physical Downlink Control CHannel-   PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol-   PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared CHannel-   PDU Protocol Data Unit-   PHICH Physical HARQ Indicator CHannel-   PHY PHYsical-   PLMN Public Land Mobile Network-   PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator-   PRACH Physical Random Access CHannel-   PRB Physical Resource Block-   PSCell Primary Secondary Cell-   PSS Primary Synchronization Signal-   pTAG primary Timing Advance Group-   PT-RS Phase Tracking Reference Signal-   PUCCH Physical Uplink Control CHannel-   PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared CHannel-   QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation-   QFI Quality of Service Indicator-   QoS Quality of Service-   QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying-   RA Random Access-   RACH Random Access CHannel-   RAN Radio Access Network-   RAT Radio Access Technology-   RA-RNTI Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier-   RB Resource Blocks-   RBG Resource Block Groups-   RI Rank indicator-   RLC Radio Link Control-   RLM Radio Link Monitoring-   RRC Radio Resource Control-   RS Reference Signal-   RSRP Reference Signal Received Power-   SCC Secondary Component Carrier-   SCell Secondary Cell-   SCG Secondary Cell Group-   SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access-   SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol-   SDU Service Data Unit-   SeNB Secondary evolved Node B-   SFN System Frame Number-   S-GW Serving GateWay-   SI System Information-   SIB System Information Block-   SMF Session Management Function-   SN Secondary Node-   SpCell Special Cell-   SRB Signaling Radio Bearer-   SRS Sounding Reference Signal-   SS Synchronization Signal-   SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal-   sTAG secondary Timing Advance Group-   TA Timing Advance-   TAG Timing Advance Group-   TAI Tracking Area Identifier-   TAT Time Alignment Timer-   TB Transport Block-   TC-RNTI Temporary Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier-   TDD Time Division Duplex-   TDMA Time Division Multiple Access-   TTI Transmission Time Interval-   UCI Uplink Control Information-   UE User Equipment-   UL Uplink-   UL-SCH Uplink Shared CHannel-   UPF User Plane Function-   UPGW User Plane Gateway-   VHDL VHSIC Hardware Description Language-   Xn-C Xn-Control plane-   Xn-U Xn-User plane

Examples described herein may be implemented using various physicallayer modulation and transmission mechanisms. Example transmissionmechanisms may include, but are not limited to: Code Division MultipleAccess (CDMA), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA),Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Wavelet technologies, and/or thelike. Hybrid transmission mechanisms such as TDMA/CDMA, and/or OFDM/CDMAmay be used. Various modulation schemes may be used for signaltransmission in the physical layer. Examples of modulation schemesinclude, but are not limited to: phase, amplitude, code, a combinationof these, and/or the like. An example radio transmission method mayimplement Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) using Binary Phase ShiftKeying (BPSK), Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16-QAM, 64-QAM,256-QAM, 1024-QAM and/or the like. Physical radio transmission may beenhanced by dynamically or semi-dynamically changing the modulation andcoding scheme, for example, depending on transmission requirementsand/or radio conditions.

FIG. 1 shows an example Radio Access Network (RAN) architecture. A RANnode may comprise a next generation Node B (gNB) (e.g., 120A, 120B)providing New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards a first wireless device (e.g., 110A). A RAN nodemay comprise a base station such as a next generation evolved Node B(ng-eNB) (e.g., 120C, 120D), providing Evolved UMTS Terrestrial RadioAccess (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminationstowards a second wireless device (e.g., 110B). A first wireless device110A may communicate with a base station, such as a gNB 120A, over a Uuinterface. A second wireless device 110B may communicate with a basestation, such as an ng-eNB 120D, over a Uu interface. The wirelessdevices 110A and/or 110B may be structurally similar to wireless devicesshown in and/or described in connection with other drawing figures. TheNode B 120A, the Node B 120B, the Node B 120C, and/or the Node B 120Dmay be structurally similar to Nodes B and/or base stations shown inand/or described in connection with other drawing figures.

A base station, such as a gNB (e.g., 120A, 120B, etc.) and/or an ng-eNB(e.g., 120C, 120D, etc.) may host functions such as radio resourcemanagement and scheduling, IP header compression, encryption andintegrity protection of data, selection of Access and MobilityManagement Function (AMF) at wireless device (e.g., User Equipment (UE))attachment, routing of user plane and control plane data, connectionsetup and release, scheduling and transmission of paging messages (e.g.,originated from the AMF), scheduling and transmission of systembroadcast information (e.g., originated from the AMF or Operation andMaintenance (O&M)), measurement and measurement reporting configuration,transport level packet marking in the uplink, session management,support of network slicing, Quality of Service (QoS) flow management andmapping to data radio bearers, support of wireless devices in aninactive state (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE state), distribution function forNon-Access Stratum (NAS) messages, RAN sharing, dual connectivity,and/or tight interworking between NR and E-UTRA.

One or more first base stations (e.g., gNBs 120A and 120B) and/or one ormore second base stations (e.g., ng-eNBs 120C and 120D) may beinterconnected with each other via Xn interface. A first base station(e.g., gNB 120A, 120B, etc.) or a second base station (e.g., ng-eNB120C, 120D, etc.) may be connected via NG interfaces to a network, suchas a 5G Core Network (5GC). A 5GC may comprise one or more AMF/User PlanFunction (UPF) functions (e.g., 130A and/or 130B). A base station (e.g.,a gNB and/or an ng-eNB) may be connected to a UPF via an NG-User plane(NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g.,non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane Protocol Data Units (PDUs)between a RAN node and the UPF. A base station (e.g., a gNB and/or anng-eNB) may be connected to an AMF via an NG-Control plane (NG-C)interface. The NG-C interface may provide functions such as NG interfacemanagement, wireless device (e.g., UE) context management, wirelessdevice (e.g., UE) mobility management, transport of NAS messages,paging, PDU session management, configuration transfer, and/or warningmessage transmission.

A UPF may host functions such as anchor point for intra-/inter-RadioAccess Technology (RAT) mobility (e.g., if applicable), external PDUsession point of interconnect to data network, packet routing andforwarding, packet inspection and user plane part of policy ruleenforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classifier to supportrouting traffic flows to a data network, branching point to supportmulti-homed PDU session, quality of service (QoS) handling for userplane, packet filtering, gating, Uplink (UL)/Downlink (DL) rateenforcement, uplink traffic verification (e.g., Service Data Flow (SDF)to QoS flow mapping), downlink packet buffering, and/or downlink datanotification triggering.

An AMF may host functions such as NAS signaling termination, NASsignaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter CoreNetwork (CN) node signaling (e.g., for mobility between 3rd GenerationPartnership Project (3GPP) access networks), idle mode wireless devicereachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission),registration area management, support of intra-system and inter-systemmobility, access authentication, access authorization including check ofroaming rights, mobility management control (e.g., subscription and/orpolicies), support of network slicing, and/or Session ManagementFunction (SMF) selection.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane protocol stack. A Service DataAdaptation Protocol (SDAP) (e.g., 211 and 221), Packet Data ConvergenceProtocol (PDCP) (e.g., 212 and 222), Radio Link Control (RLC) (e.g., 213and 223), and Media Access Control (MAC) (e.g., 214 and 224) sublayers,and a Physical (PHY) (e.g., 215 and 225) layer, may be terminated in awireless device (e.g., 110) and in a base station (e.g., 120) on anetwork side. A PHY layer may provide transport services to higherlayers (e.g., MAC, RRC, etc.). Services and/or functions of a MACsublayer may comprise mapping between logical channels and transportchannels, multiplexing and/or demultiplexing of MAC Service Data Units(SDUs) belonging to the same or different logical channels into and/orfrom Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to and/or from the PHY layer,scheduling information reporting, error correction through HybridAutomatic Repeat request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier forCarrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between wireless devicessuch as by using dynamic scheduling, priority handling between logicalchannels of a wireless device such as by using logical channelprioritization, and/or padding. A MAC entity may support one or multiplenumerologies and/or transmission timings. Mapping restrictions in alogical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/ortransmission timing a logical channel may use. An RLC sublayer maysupport transparent mode (TM), unacknowledged mode (UM), and/oracknowledged mode (AM) transmission modes. The RLC configuration may beper logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/orTransmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. Automatic Repeat Request(ARQ) may operate on any of the numerologies and/or TTI durations withwhich the logical channel is configured. Services and functions of thePDCP layer for the user plane may comprise, for example, sequencenumbering, header compression and decompression, transfer of user data,reordering and duplicate detection, PDCP PDU routing (e.g., such as forsplit bearers), retransmission of PDCP SDUs, ciphering, deciphering andintegrity protection, PDCP SDU discard, PDCP re-establishment and datarecovery for RLC AM, and/or duplication of PDCP PDUs. Services and/orfunctions of SDAP may comprise, for example, mapping between a QoS flowand a data radio bearer. Services and/or functions of SDAP may comprisemapping a Quality of Service Indicator (QFI) in DL and UL packets. Aprotocol entity of SDAP may be configured for an individual PDU session.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane protocol stack. A PDCP (e.g., 233and 242), RLC (e.g., 234 and 243), and MAC (e.g., 235 and 244)sublayers, and a PHY (e.g., 236 and 245) layer, may be terminated in awireless device (e.g., 110), and in a base station (e.g., 120) on anetwork side, and perform service and/or functions described above. RRC(e.g., 232 and 241) may be terminated in a wireless device and a basestation on a network side. Services and/or functions of RRC may comprisebroadcast of system information related to AS and/or NAS; paging (e.g.,initiated by a 5GC or a RAN); establishment, maintenance, and/or releaseof an RRC connection between the wireless device and RAN; securityfunctions such as key management, establishment, configuration,maintenance, and/or release of Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) and DataRadio Bearers (DRBs); mobility functions; QoS management functions;wireless device measurement reporting and control of the reporting;detection of and recovery from radio link failure; and/or NAS messagetransfer to/from NAS from/to a wireless device. NAS control protocol(e.g., 231 and 251) may be terminated in the wireless device and AMF(e.g., 130) on a network side. NAS control protocol may performfunctions such as authentication, mobility management between a wirelessdevice and an AMF (e.g., for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access), and/orsession management between a wireless device and an SMF (e.g., for 3GPPaccess and non-3GPP access).

A base station may configure a plurality of logical channels for awireless device. A logical channel of the plurality of logical channelsmay correspond to a radio bearer. The radio bearer may be associatedwith a QoS requirement. A base station may configure a logical channelto be mapped to one or more TTIs and/or numerologies in a plurality ofTTIs and/or numerologies. The wireless device may receive DownlinkControl Information (DCI) via a Physical Downlink Control CHannel(PDCCH) indicating an uplink grant. The uplink grant may be for a firstTTI and/or a first numerology and may indicate uplink resources fortransmission of a transport block. The base station may configure eachlogical channel in the plurality of logical channels with one or moreparameters to be used by a logical channel prioritization procedure atthe MAC layer of the wireless device. The one or more parameters maycomprise, for example, priority, prioritized bit rate, etc. A logicalchannel in the plurality of logical channels may correspond to one ormore buffers comprising data associated with the logical channel. Thelogical channel prioritization procedure may allocate the uplinkresources to one or more first logical channels in the plurality oflogical channels and/or to one or more MAC Control Elements (CEs). Theone or more first logical channels may be mapped to the first TTI and/orthe first numerology. The MAC layer at the wireless device may multiplexone or more MAC CEs and/or one or more MAC SDUs (e.g., logical channel)in a MAC PDU (e.g., transport block). The MAC PDU may comprise a MACheader comprising a plurality of MAC sub-headers. A MAC sub-header inthe plurality of MAC sub-headers may correspond to a MAC CE or a MAC SUD(e.g., logical channel) in the one or more MAC CEs and/or in the one ormore MAC SDUs. A MAC CE and/or a logical channel may be configured witha Logical Channel IDentifier (LCID). An LCID for a logical channeland/or a MAC CE may be fixed and/or pre-configured. An LCID for alogical channel and/or MAC CE may be configured for the wireless deviceby the base station. The MAC sub-header corresponding to a MAC CE and/ora MAC SDU may comprise an LCID associated with the MAC CE and/or the MACSDU.

A base station may activate, deactivate, and/or impact one or moreprocesses (e.g., set values of one or more parameters of the one or moreprocesses or start and/or stop one or more timers of the one or moreprocesses) at the wireless device, for example, by using one or more MACcommands. The one or more MAC commands may comprise one or more MACcontrol elements. The one or more processes may comprise activationand/or deactivation of PDCP packet duplication for one or more radiobearers. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) a MAC CE comprisingone or more fields. The values of the fields may indicate activationand/or deactivation of PDCP duplication for the one or more radiobearers. The one or more processes may comprise Channel StateInformation (CSI) transmission of on one or more cells. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) one or more MAC CEs indicating activationand/or deactivation of the CSI transmission on the one or more cells.The one or more processes may comprise activation and/or deactivation ofone or more secondary cells. The base station may send (e.g., transmit)a MAC CE indicating activation and/or deactivation of one or moresecondary cells. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or moreMAC CEs indicating starting and/or stopping of one or more DiscontinuousReception (DRX) timers at the wireless device. The base station may send(e.g., transmit) one or more MAC CEs indicating one or more timingadvance values for one or more Timing Advance Groups (TAGs).

FIG. 3 shows an example of base stations (base station 1, 120A, and basestation 2, 120B) and a wireless device 110. The wireless device 110 maycomprise a UE or any other wireless device. The base station (e.g.,120A, 120B) may comprise a Node B, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, or any other basestation. A wireless device and/or a base station may perform one or morefunctions of a relay node. The base station 1, 120A, may comprise atleast one communication interface 320A (e.g., a wireless modem, anantenna, a wired modem, and/or the like), at least one processor 321A,and at least one set of program code instructions 323A that may bestored in non-transitory memory 322A and executable by the at least oneprocessor 321A. The base station 2, 120B, may comprise at least onecommunication interface 320B, at least one processor 321B, and at leastone set of program code instructions 323B that may be stored innon-transitory memory 322B and executable by the at least one processor321B.

A base station may comprise any number of sectors, for example: 1, 2, 3,4, or 6 sectors. A base station may comprise any number of cells, forexample, ranging from 1 to 50 cells or more. A cell may be categorized,for example, as a primary cell or secondary cell. At Radio ResourceControl (RRC) connection establishment, re-establishment, handover,etc., a serving cell may provide NAS (non-access stratum) mobilityinformation (e.g., Tracking Area Identifier (TAI)). At RRC connectionre-establishment and/or handover, a serving cell may provide securityinput. This serving cell may be referred to as the Primary Cell (PCell).In the downlink, a carrier corresponding to the PCell may be a DLPrimary Component Carrier (PCC). In the uplink, a carrier may be an ULPCC. Secondary Cells (SCells) may be configured to form together with aPCell a set of serving cells, for example, depending on wireless devicecapabilities. In a downlink, a carrier corresponding to an SCell may bea downlink secondary component carrier (DL SCC). In an uplink, a carriermay be an uplink secondary component carrier (UL SCC). An SCell may ormay not have an uplink carrier.

A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier,may be assigned a physical cell ID and/or a cell index. A carrier(downlink and/or uplink) may belong to one cell. The cell ID and/or cellindex may identify the downlink carrier and/or uplink carrier of thecell (e.g., depending on the context it is used). A cell ID may beequally referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred toas a carrier index. A physical cell ID and/or a cell index may beassigned to a cell. A cell ID may be determined using a synchronizationsignal transmitted via a downlink carrier. A cell index may bedetermined using RRC messages. A first physical cell ID for a firstdownlink carrier may indicate that the first physical cell ID is for acell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same concept may beused, for example, with carrier activation and/or deactivation (e.g.,secondary cell activation and/or deactivation). A first carrier that isactivated may indicate that a cell comprising the first carrier isactivated.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to a wireless device one ormore messages (e.g., RRC messages) comprising a plurality ofconfiguration parameters for one or more cells. One or more cells maycomprise at least one primary cell and at least one secondary cell. AnRRC message may be broadcasted and/or unicasted to the wireless device.Configuration parameters may comprise common parameters and dedicatedparameters.

Services and/or functions of an RRC sublayer may comprise at least oneof: broadcast of system information related to AS and/or NAS; paginginitiated by a 5GC and/or an NG-RAN; establishment, maintenance, and/orrelease of an RRC connection between a wireless device and an NG-RAN,which may comprise at least one of addition, modification, and/orrelease of carrier aggregation; and/or addition, modification, and/orrelease of dual connectivity in NR or between E-UTRA and NR. Servicesand/or functions of an RRC sublayer may comprise at least one ofsecurity functions comprising key management; establishment,configuration, maintenance, and/or release of Signaling Radio Bearers(SRBs) and/or Data Radio Bearers (DRBs); mobility functions which maycomprise at least one of a handover (e.g., intra NR mobility orinter-RAT mobility) and/or a context transfer; and/or a wireless devicecell selection and/or reselection and/or control of cell selection andreselection. Services and/or functions of an RRC sublayer may compriseat least one of QoS management functions; a wireless device measurementconfiguration/reporting; detection of and/or recovery from radio linkfailure; and/or NAS message transfer to and/or from a core networkentity (e.g., AMF, Mobility Management Entity (MME)) from and/or to thewireless device.

An RRC sublayer may support an RRC_Idle state, an RRC_Inactive state,and/or an RRC_Connected state for a wireless device. In an RRC_Idlestate, a wireless device may perform at least one of: Public Land MobileNetwork (PLMN) selection; receiving broadcasted system information; cellselection and/or re-selection; monitoring and/or receiving a paging formobile terminated data initiated by 5GC; paging for mobile terminateddata area managed by 5GC; and/or DRX for CN paging configured via NAS.In an RRC_Inactive state, a wireless device may perform at least one of:receiving broadcasted system information; cell selection and/orre-selection; monitoring and/or receiving a RAN and/or CN paginginitiated by an NG-RAN and/or a 5GC; RAN-based notification area (RNA)managed by an NG-RAN; and/or DRX for a RAN and/or CN paging configuredby NG-RAN/NAS. In an RRC_Idle state of a wireless device, a base station(e.g., NG-RAN) may keep a 5GC-NG-RAN connection (e.g., both C/U-planes)for the wireless device; and/or store a wireless device AS context forthe wireless device. In an RRC_Connected state of a wireless device, abase station (e.g., NG-RAN) may perform at least one of: establishmentof 5GC-NG-RAN connection (both C/U-planes) for the wireless device;storing a UE AS context for the wireless device; send (e.g., transmit)and/or receive of unicast data to and/or from the wireless device;and/or network-controlled mobility based on measurement results receivedfrom the wireless device. In an RRC_Connected state of a wirelessdevice, an NG-RAN may know a cell to which the wireless device belongs.

System information (SI) may be divided into minimum SI and other SI. Theminimum SI may be periodically broadcast. The minimum SI may comprisebasic information required for initial access and/or information foracquiring any other SI broadcast periodically and/or provisionedon-demand (e.g., scheduling information). The other SI may either bebroadcast, and/or be provisioned in a dedicated manner, such as eithertriggered by a network and/or upon request from a wireless device. Aminimum SI may be transmitted via two different downlink channels usingdifferent messages (e.g., MasterInformationBlock andSystemInformationBlockType1). Another SI may be transmitted viaSystemInformationBlockType2. For a wireless device in an RRC_Connectedstate, dedicated RRC signalling may be used for the request and deliveryof the other SI. For the wireless device in the RRC_Idle state and/or inthe RRC_Inactive state, the request may trigger a random accessprocedure.

A wireless device may report its radio access capability information,which may be static. A base station may request one or more indicationsof capabilities for a wireless device to report based on bandinformation. A temporary capability restriction request may be sent bythe wireless device (e.g., if allowed by a network) to signal thelimited availability of some capabilities (e.g., due to hardwaresharing, interference, and/or overheating) to the base station. The basestation may confirm or reject the request. The temporary capabilityrestriction may be transparent to 5GC (e.g., static capabilities may bestored in 5GC).

A wireless device may have an RRC connection with a network, forexample, if CA is configured. At RRC connection establishment,re-establishment, and/or handover procedures, a serving cell may provideNAS mobility information. At RRC connection re-establishment and/orhandover, a serving cell may provide a security input. This serving cellmay be referred to as the PCell. SCells may be configured to formtogether with the PCell a set of serving cells, for example, dependingon the capabilities of the wireless device. The configured set ofserving cells for the wireless device may comprise a PCell and one ormore SCells.

The reconfiguration, addition, and/or removal of SCells may be performedby RRC messaging. At intra-NR handover, RRC may add, remove, and/orreconfigure SCells for usage with the target PCell. Dedicated RRCsignaling may be used (e.g., if adding a new SCell) to send all requiredsystem information of the SCell (e.g., if in connected mode, wirelessdevices may not acquire broadcasted system information directly from theSCells).

The purpose of an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure may be tomodify an RRC connection, (e.g., to establish, modify, and/or releaseRBs; to perform handover; to setup, modify, and/or release measurements,for example, to add, modify, and/or release SCells and cell groups). NASdedicated information may be transferred from the network to thewireless device, for example, as part of the RRC connectionreconfiguration procedure. The RRCConnectionReconfiguration message maybe a command to modify an RRC connection. One or more RRC messages mayconvey information for measurement configuration, mobility control,and/or radio resource configuration (e.g., RBs, MAC main configuration,and/or physical channel configuration), which may comprise anyassociated dedicated NAS information and/or security configuration. Thewireless device may perform an SCell release, for example, if thereceived RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes thesCellToReleaseList. The wireless device may perform SCell additions ormodification, for example, if the received RRC ConnectionReconfiguration message includes the sCellToAddModList.

An RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or resumeprocedure may be to establish, reestablish, and/or resume an RRCconnection, respectively. An RRC connection establishment procedure maycomprise SRB1 establishment. The RRC connection establishment proceduremay be used to transfer the initial NAS dedicated information and/ormessage from a wireless device to an E-UTRAN. TheRRCConnectionReestablishment message may be used to re-establish SRB1.

A measurement report procedure may be used to transfer measurementresults from a wireless device to an NG-RAN. The wireless device mayinitiate a measurement report procedure, for example, after successfulsecurity activation. A measurement report message may be used to send(e.g., transmit) measurement results.

The wireless device 110 may comprise at least one communicationinterface 310 (e.g., a wireless modem, an antenna, and/or the like), atleast one processor 314, and at least one set of program codeinstructions 316 that may be stored in non-transitory memory 315 andexecutable by the at least one processor 314. The wireless device 110may further comprise at least one of at least one speaker and/ormicrophone 311, at least one keypad 312, at least one display and/ortouchpad 313, at least one power source 317, at least one globalpositioning system (GPS) chipset 318, and/or other peripherals 319.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110, the processor 321A of thebase station 1 120A, and/or the processor 321B of the base station 2120B may comprise at least one of a general-purpose processor, a digitalsignal processor (DSP), a controller, a microcontroller, an applicationspecific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array(FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/ortransistor logic, discrete hardware components, and/or the like. Theprocessor 314 of the wireless device 110, the processor 321A in basestation 1 120A, and/or the processor 321B in base station 2 120B mayperform at least one of signal coding and/or processing, dataprocessing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any otherfunctionality that may enable the wireless device 110, the base station1 120A and/or the base station 2 120B to operate in a wirelessenvironment.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110 may be connected to and/orin communication with the speaker and/or microphone 311, the keypad 312,and/or the display and/or touchpad 313. The processor 314 may receiveuser input data from and/or provide user output data to the speakerand/or microphone 311, the keypad 312, and/or the display and/ortouchpad 313. The processor 314 in the wireless device 110 may receivepower from the power source 317 and/or may be configured to distributethe power to the other components in the wireless device 110. The powersource 317 may comprise at least one of one or more dry cell batteries,solar cells, fuel cells, and/or the like. The processor 314 may beconnected to the GPS chipset 318. The GPS chipset 318 may be configuredto provide geographic location information of the wireless device 110.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110 may further be connected toand/or in communication with other peripherals 319, which may compriseone or more software and/or hardware modules that may provide additionalfeatures and/or functionalities. For example, the peripherals 319 maycomprise at least one of an accelerometer, a satellite transceiver, adigital camera, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset,a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internetbrowser, and/or the like.

The communication interface 320A of the base station 1, 120A, and/or thecommunication interface 320B of the base station 2, 120B, may beconfigured to communicate with the communication interface 310 of thewireless device 110, for example, via a wireless link 330A and/or via awireless link 330B, respectively. The communication interface 320A ofthe base station 1, 120A, may communicate with the communicationinterface 320B of the base station 2 and/or other RAN and/or corenetwork nodes.

The wireless link 330A and/or the wireless link 330B may comprise atleast one of a bi-directional link and/or a directional link. Thecommunication interface 310 of the wireless device 110 may be configuredto communicate with the communication interface 320A of the base station1 120A and/or with the communication interface 320B of the base station2 120B. The base station 1 120A and the wireless device 110, and/or thebase station 2 120B and the wireless device 110, may be configured tosend and receive transport blocks, for example, via the wireless link330A and/or via the wireless link 330B, respectively. The wireless link330A and/or the wireless link 330B may use at least one frequencycarrier. Transceiver(s) may be used. A transceiver may be a device thatcomprises both a transmitter and a receiver. Transceivers may be used indevices such as wireless devices, base stations, relay nodes, computingdevices, and/or the like. Radio technology may be implemented in thecommunication interface 310, 320A, and/or 320B, and the wireless link330A and/or 330B. The radio technology may comprise one or more elementsshown in FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, FIG. 4D, FIG. 6, FIG. 7A, FIG. 7B,FIG. 8, and associated text, described below.

Other nodes in a wireless network (e.g. AMF, UPF, SMF, etc.) maycomprise one or more communication interfaces, one or more processors,and memory storing instructions. A node (e.g., wireless device, basestation, AMF, SMF, UPF, servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like)may comprise one or more processors, and memory storing instructionsthat when executed by the one or more processors causes the node toperform certain processes and/or functions. Single-carrier and/ormulti-carrier communication operation may be performed. A non-transitorytangible computer readable media may comprise instructions executable byone or more processors to cause operation of single-carrier and/ormulti-carrier communications. An article of manufacture may comprise anon-transitory tangible computer readable machine-accessible mediumhaving instructions encoded thereon for enabling programmable hardwareto cause a node to enable operation of single-carrier and/ormulti-carrier communications. The node may include processors, memory,interfaces, and/or the like.

An interface may comprise at least one of a hardware interface, afirmware interface, a software interface, and/or a combination thereof.The hardware interface may comprise connectors, wires, and/or electronicdevices such as drivers, amplifiers, and/or the like. The softwareinterface may comprise code stored in a memory device to implementprotocol(s), protocol layers, communication drivers, device drivers,combinations thereof, and/or the like. The firmware interface maycomprise a combination of embedded hardware and/or code stored in(and/or in communication with) a memory device to implement connections,electronic device operations, protocol(s), protocol layers,communication drivers, device drivers, hardware operations, combinationsthereof, and/or the like.

A communication network may comprise the wireless device 110, the basestation 1, 120A, the base station 2, 120B, and/or any other device. Thecommunication network may comprise any number and/or type of devices,such as, for example, computing devices, wireless devices, mobiledevices, handsets, tablets, laptops, internet of things (IoT) devices,hotspots, cellular repeaters, computing devices, and/or, more generally,user equipment (e.g., UE). Although one or more of the above types ofdevices may be referenced herein (e.g., UE, wireless device, computingdevice, etc.), it should be understood that any device herein maycomprise any one or more of the above types of devices or similardevices. The communication network, and any other network referencedherein, may comprise an LTE network, a 5G network, or any other networkfor wireless communications. Apparatuses, systems, and/or methodsdescribed herein may generally be described as implemented on one ormore devices (e.g., wireless device, base station, eNB, gNB, computingdevice, etc.), in one or more networks, but it will be understood thatone or more features and steps may be implemented on any device and/orin any network. As used throughout, the term “base station” may compriseone or more of: a base station, a node, a Node B, a gNB, an eNB, anng-eNB, a relay node (e.g., an integrated access and backhaul (IAB)node), a donor node (e.g., a donor eNB, a donor gNB, etc.), an accesspoint (e.g., a WiFi access point), a computing device, a device capableof wirelessly communicating, or any other device capable of sendingand/or receiving signals. As used throughout, the term “wireless device”may comprise one or more of: a UE, a handset, a mobile device, acomputing device, a node, a device capable of wirelessly communicating,or any other device capable of sending and/or receiving signals. Anyreference to one or more of these terms/devices also considers use ofany other term/device mentioned above.

FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C and FIG. 4D show examples of uplink anddownlink signal transmission. FIG. 4A shows an example uplinktransmitter for at least one physical channel. A baseband signalrepresenting a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or morefunctions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of:scrambling (e.g., by Scrambling); modulation of scrambled bits togenerate complex-valued symbols (e.g., by a Modulation mapper); mappingof the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or severaltransmission layers (e.g., by a Layer mapper); transform precoding togenerate complex-valued symbols (e.g., by a Transform precoder);precoding of the complex-valued symbols (e.g., by a Precoder); mappingof precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements (e.g., by aResource element mapper); generation of complex-valued time-domainSingle Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP-OFDMsignal for an antenna port (e.g., by a signal gen.); and/or the like. ASC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated, for example, iftransform precoding is enabled. A CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmissionmay be generated by FIG. 4A, for example, if transform precoding is notenabled. These functions are shown as examples and other mechanisms maybe implemented.

FIG. 4B shows an example of modulation and up-conversion to the carrierfrequency of a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for anantenna port and/or for the complex-valued Physical Random AccessCHannel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be performed prior totransmission.

FIG. 4C shows an example of downlink transmissions. The baseband signalrepresenting a downlink physical channel may perform one or morefunctions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of codedbits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel (e.g., byScrambling); modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valuedmodulation symbols (e.g., by a Modulation mapper); mapping of thecomplex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmissionlayers (e.g., by a Layer mapper); precoding of the complex-valuedmodulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports(e.g., by Precoding); mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols foran antenna port to resource elements (e.g., by a Resource elementmapper); generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for anantenna port (e.g., by an OFDM signal gen.); and/or the like. Thesefunctions are shown as examples and other mechanisms may be implemented.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a first symbol and a secondsymbol on an antenna port, to a wireless device. The wireless device mayinfer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, etc.) forconveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel forconveying the first symbol on the antenna port. A first antenna port anda second antenna port may be quasi co-located, for example, if one ormore large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol onthe first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel overwhich a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one ormore large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: delay spread;Doppler spread; Doppler shift; average gain; average delay; and/orspatial receiving (Rx) parameters.

FIG. 4D shows an example modulation and up-conversion to the carrierfrequency of the complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antennaport. Filtering may be performed prior to transmission.

FIG. 5A shows example uplink channel mapping and example uplink physicalsignals. A physical layer may provide one or more information transferservices to a MAC and/or one or more higher layers. The physical layermay provide the one or more information transfer services to the MAC viaone or more transport channels. An information transfer service mayindicate how and/or with what characteristics data is transferred overthe radio interface.

Uplink transport channels may comprise an Uplink-Shared CHannel (UL-SCH)501 and/or a Random Access CHannel (RACH) 502. A wireless device maysend (e.g., transmit) one or more uplink DM-RSs 506 to a base stationfor channel estimation, for example, for coherent demodulation of one ormore uplink physical channels (e.g., PUSCH 503 and/or PUCCH 504). Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) to a base station at least oneuplink DM-RS 506 with PUSCH 503 and/or PUCCH 504, wherein the at leastone uplink DM-RS 506 may be spanning a same frequency range as acorresponding physical channel. The base station may configure thewireless device with one or more uplink DM-RS configurations. At leastone DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Afront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., 1or 2 adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more additional uplink DM-RS may beconfigured to send (e.g., transmit) at one or more symbols of a PUSCHand/or PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure thewireless device with a maximum number of front-loaded DM-RS symbols forPUSCH and/or PUCCH. The wireless device may schedule a single-symbolDM-RS and/or double symbol DM-RS based on a maximum number offront-loaded DM-RS symbols, wherein the base station may configure thewireless device with one or more additional uplink DM-RS for PUSCHand/or PUCCH. A new radio network may support, for example, at least forCP-OFDM, a common DM-RS structure for DL and UL, wherein a DM-RSlocation, DM-RS pattern, and/or scrambling sequence may be same ordifferent.

Whether or not an uplink PT-RS 507 is present may depend on an RRCconfiguration. A presence of the uplink PT-RS may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured. A presence and/or a pattern of theuplink PT-RS 507 in a scheduled resource may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured by a combination of RRC signaling and/orassociation with one or more parameters used for other purposes (e.g.,Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)) which may be indicated by DCI. Ifconfigured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS 507 may be associatedwith one or more DCI parameters comprising at least a MCS. A radionetwork may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined intime/frequency domain. If present, a frequency domain density may beassociated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. Awireless device may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RSport. A number of PT-RS ports may be less than a number of DM-RS portsin a scheduled resource. The uplink PT-RS 507 may be confined in thescheduled time/frequency duration for a wireless device.

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRS 508 to a base stationfor channel state estimation, for example, to support uplink channeldependent scheduling and/or link adaptation. The SRS 508 sent (e.g.,transmitted) by the wireless device may allow for the base station toestimate an uplink channel state at one or more different frequencies. Abase station scheduler may use an uplink channel state to assign one ormore resource blocks of a certain quality (e.g., above a qualitythreshold) for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the wireless device.The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device withone or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base stationmay configure the wireless device with one or more SRS resources. An SRSresource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g.,RRC) parameter. An SRS resource in each of one or more SRS resource setsmay be sent (e.g., transmitted) at a time instant, for example, if ahigher layer parameter indicates beam management. The wireless devicemay send (e.g., transmit) one or more SRS resources in different SRSresource sets simultaneously. A new radio network may support aperiodic,periodic, and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The wireless devicemay send (e.g., transmit) SRS resources, for example, based on one ormore trigger types. The one or more trigger types may comprise higherlayer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DCI formats (e.g., atleast one DCI format may be used for a wireless device to select atleast one of one or more configured SRS resource sets). An SRS triggertype 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling.An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or moreDCI formats. The wireless device may be configured to send (e.g.,transmit) the SRS 508 after a transmission of PUSCH 503 andcorresponding uplink DM-RS 506, for example, if PUSCH 503 and the SRS508 are transmitted in a same slot.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with oneor more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one offollowing: an SRS resource configuration identifier, a number of SRSports, time domain behavior of SRS resource configuration (e.g., anindication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS), slot(mini-slot, and/or subframe) level periodicity and/or offset for aperiodic and/or aperiodic SRS resource, a number of OFDM symbols in aSRS resource, starting OFDM symbol of a SRS resource, an SRS bandwidth,a frequency hopping bandwidth, a cyclic shift, and/or an SRS sequenceID.

FIG. 5B shows an example downlink channel mapping and downlink physicalsignals. Downlink transport channels may comprise a Downlink-SharedCHannel (DL-SCH) 511, a Paging CHannel (PCH) 512, and/or a BroadcastCHannel (BCH) 513. A transport channel may be mapped to one or morecorresponding physical channels. An UL-SCH 501 may be mapped to aPhysical Uplink Shared CHannel (PUSCH) 503. A RACH 502 may be mapped toa PRACH 505. A DL-SCH 511 and a PCH 512 may be mapped to a PhysicalDownlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) 514. A BCH 513 may be mapped to aPhysical Broadcast CHannel (PBCH) 516.

A radio network may comprise one or more downlink and/or uplinktransport channels. The radio network may comprise one or more physicalchannels without a corresponding transport channel. The one or morephysical channels may be used for an Uplink Control Information (UCI)509 and/or a Downlink Control Information (DCI) 517. A Physical UplinkControl CHannel (PUCCH) 504 may carry UCI 509 from a wireless device toa base station. A Physical Downlink Control CHannel (PDCCH) 515 maycarry the DCI 517 from a base station to a wireless device. The radionetwork (e.g., NR) may support the UCI 509 multiplexing in the PUSCH503, for example, if the UCI 509 and the PUSCH 503 transmissions maycoincide in a slot (e.g., at least in part). The UCI 509 may comprise atleast one of a CSI, an Acknowledgement (ACK)/Negative Acknowledgement(NACK), and/or a scheduling request. The DCI 517 via the PDCCH 515 mayindicate at least one of following: one or more downlink assignmentsand/or one or more uplink scheduling grants.

In uplink, a wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or moreReference Signals (RSs) to a base station. The one or more RSs maycomprise at least one of a Demodulation-RS (DM-RS) 506, a PhaseTracking-RS (PT-RS) 507, and/or a Sounding RS (SRS) 508. In downlink, abase station may send (e.g., transmit, unicast, multicast, and/orbroadcast) one or more RSs to a wireless device. The one or more RSs maycomprise at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS)/Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) 521, a CSI-RS 522, a DM-RS523, and/or a PT-RS 524.

In a time domain, an SS/PBCH block may comprise one or more OFDM symbols(e.g., 4 OFDM symbols numbered in increasing order from 0 to 3) withinthe SS/PBCH block. An SS/PBCH block may comprise the PSS/SSS 521 and/orthe PBCH 516. In the frequency domain, an SS/PBCH block may comprise oneor more contiguous subcarriers (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers withthe subcarriers numbered in increasing order from 0 to 239) within theSS/PBCH block. The PSS/SSS 521 may occupy, for example, 1 OFDM symboland 127 subcarriers. The PBCH 516 may span across, for example, 3 OFDMsymbols and 240 subcarriers. A wireless device may assume that one ormore SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same block index may be quasico-located, for example, with respect to Doppler spread, Doppler shift,average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters. A wirelessdevice may not assume quasi co-location for other SS/PBCH blocktransmissions. A periodicity of an SS/PBCH block may be configured by aradio network (e.g., by an RRC signaling). One or more time locations inwhich the SS/PBCH block may be sent may be determined by sub-carrierspacing. A wireless device may assume a band-specific sub-carrierspacing for an SS/PBCH block, for example, unless a radio network hasconfigured the wireless device to assume a different sub-carrierspacing.

The downlink CSI-RS 522 may be used for a wireless device to acquirechannel state information. A radio network may support periodic,aperiodic, and/or semi-persistent transmission of the downlink CSI-RS522. A base station may semi-statically configure and/or reconfigure awireless device with periodic transmission of the downlink CSI-RS 522. Aconfigured CSI-RS resources may be activated and/or deactivated. Forsemi-persistent transmission, an activation and/or deactivation of aCSI-RS resource may be triggered dynamically. A CSI-RS configuration maycomprise one or more parameters indicating at least a number of antennaports. A base station may configure a wireless device with 32 ports, orany other number of ports. A base station may semi-statically configurea wireless device with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. One or moreCSI-RS resources may be allocated from one or more CSI-RS resource setsto one or more wireless devices. A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure one or more parameters indicating CSI RS resource mapping, forexample, time-domain location of one or more CSI-RS resources, abandwidth of a CSI-RS resource, and/or a periodicity. A wireless devicemay be configured to use the same OFDM symbols for the downlink CSI-RS522 and the Control Resource Set (CORESET), for example, if the downlinkCSI-RS 522 and the CORESET are spatially quasi co-located and resourceelements associated with the downlink CSI-RS 522 are the outside of PRBsconfigured for the CORESET. A wireless device may be configured to usethe same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS 522 and SS/PBCH blocks, forexample, if the downlink CSI-RS 522 and SS/PBCH blocks are spatiallyquasi co-located and resource elements associated with the downlinkCSI-RS 522 are outside of the PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or more downlink DM-RSs523 to a base station for channel estimation, for example, for coherentdemodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH514). A radio network may support one or more variable and/orconfigurable DM-RS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlinkDM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Afront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., 1or 2 adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure a wireless device with a maximum number of front-loaded DM-RSsymbols for PDSCH 514. A DM-RS configuration may support one or moreDM-RS ports. A DM-RS configuration may support at least 8 orthogonaldownlink DM-RS ports, for example, for single user-MIMO. ADM-RSconfiguration may support 12 orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports, forexample, for multiuser-MIMO. A radio network may support, for example,at least for CP-OFDM, a common DM-RS structure for DL and UL, wherein aDM-RS location, DM-RS pattern, and/or scrambling sequence may be thesame or different.

Whether or not the downlink PT-RS 524 is present may depend on an RRCconfiguration. A presence of the downlink PT-RS 524 may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured. A presence and/or a pattern of thedownlink PT-RS 524 in a scheduled resource may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured, for example, by a combination of RRCsignaling and/or an association with one or more parameters used forother purposes (e.g., MCS) which may be indicated by the DCI. Ifconfigured, a dynamic presence of the downlink PT-RS 524 may beassociated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. Aradio network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities in atime/frequency domain. If present, a frequency domain density may beassociated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. Awireless device may assume the same precoding for a DMRS port and aPT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be less than a number of DM-RSports in a scheduled resource. The downlink PT-RS 524 may be confined inthe scheduled time/frequency duration for a wireless device.

FIG. 6 shows an example transmission time and reception time for acarrier. A multicarrier OFDM communication system may include one ormore carriers, for example, ranging from 1 to 32 carriers (such as forcarrier aggregation) or ranging from 1 to 64 carriers (such as for dualconnectivity). Different radio frame structures may be supported (e.g.,for FDD and/or for TDD duplex mechanisms). FIG. 6 shows an example frametiming. Downlink and uplink transmissions may be organized into radioframes 601. Radio frame duration may be 10 milliseconds (ms). A 10 msradio frame 601 may be divided into ten equally sized subframes 602,each with a 1 ms duration. Subframe(s) may comprise one or more slots(e.g., slots 603 and 605) depending on subcarrier spacing and/or CPlength. For example, a subframe with 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz,240 kHz and 480 kHz subcarrier spacing may comprise one, two, four,eight, sixteen and thirty-two slots, respectively. In FIG. 6, a subframemay be divided into two equally sized slots 603 with 0.5 ms duration.For example, 10 subframes may be available for downlink transmission and10 subframes may be available for uplink transmissions in a 10 msinterval. Other subframe durations such as, for example, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2ms, and 5 ms may be supported. Uplink and downlink transmissions may beseparated in the frequency domain. Slot(s) may include a plurality ofOFDM symbols 604. The number of OFDM symbols 604 in a slot 605 maydepend on the cyclic prefix length. A slot may be 14 OFDM symbols forthe same subcarrier spacing of up to 480 kHz with normal CP. A slot maybe 12 OFDM symbols for the same subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz withextended CP. A slot may comprise downlink, uplink, and/or a downlinkpart and an uplink part, and/or alike.

FIG. 7A shows example sets of OFDM subcarriers. A base station maycommunicate with a wireless device using a carrier having an examplechannel bandwidth 700. Arrow(s) in the example may depict a subcarrierin a multicarrier OFDM system. The OFDM system may use technology suchas OFDM technology, SC-FDMA technology, and/or the like. An arrow 701shows a subcarrier transmitting information symbols. A subcarrierspacing 702, between two contiguous subcarriers in a carrier, may be anyone of 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz, 240 kHz, or any other frequency.Different subcarrier spacing may correspond to different transmissionnumerologies. A transmission numerology may comprise at least: anumerology index; a value of subcarrier spacing; and/or a type of cyclicprefix (CP). A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to and/or receivefrom a wireless device via a number of subcarriers 703 in a carrier. Abandwidth occupied by a number of subcarriers 703 (e.g., transmissionbandwidth) may be smaller than the channel bandwidth 700 of a carrier,for example, due to guard bands 704 and 705. Guard bands 704 and 705 maybe used to reduce interference to and from one or more neighborcarriers. A number of subcarriers (e.g., transmission bandwidth) in acarrier may depend on the channel bandwidth of the carrier and/or thesubcarrier spacing. A transmission bandwidth, for a carrier with a 20MHz channel bandwidth and a 15 kHz subcarrier spacing, may be in numberof 1024 subcarriers.

A base station and a wireless device may communicate with multiplecomponent carriers (CCs), for example, if configured with CA. Differentcomponent carriers may have different bandwidth and/or differentsubcarrier spacing, for example, if CA is supported. A base station maysend (e.g., transmit) a first type of service to a wireless device via afirst component carrier. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) asecond type of service to the wireless device via a second componentcarrier. Different types of services may have different servicerequirements (e.g., data rate, latency, reliability), which may besuitable for transmission via different component carriers havingdifferent subcarrier spacing and/or different bandwidth.

FIG. 7B shows examples of component carriers. A first component carriermay comprise a first number of subcarriers 706 having a first subcarrierspacing 709. A second component carrier may comprise a second number ofsubcarriers 707 having a second subcarrier spacing 710. A thirdcomponent carrier may comprise a third number of subcarriers 708 havinga third subcarrier spacing 711. Carriers in a multicarrier OFDMcommunication system may be contiguous carriers, non-contiguouscarriers, or a combination of both contiguous and non-contiguouscarriers.

FIG. 8 shows an example of OFDM radio resources. A carrier may have atransmission bandwidth 801. A resource grid may be in a structure offrequency domain 802 and time domain 803. A resource grid may comprise afirst number of OFDM symbols in a subframe and a second number ofresource blocks, starting from a common resource block indicated byhigher-layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling), for a transmissionnumerology and a carrier. In a resource grid, a resource element 805 maycomprise a resource unit that may be identified by a subcarrier indexand a symbol index. A subframe may comprise a first number of OFDMsymbols 807 that may depend on a numerology associated with a carrier. Asubframe may have 14 OFDM symbols for a carrier, for example, if asubcarrier spacing of a numerology of a carrier is 15 kHz. A subframemay have 28 OFDM symbols, for example, if a subcarrier spacing of anumerology is 30 kHz. A subframe may have 56 OFDM symbols, for example,if a subcarrier spacing of a numerology is 60 kHz. A subcarrier spacingof a numerology may comprise any other frequency. A second number ofresource blocks comprised in a resource grid of a carrier may depend ona bandwidth and a numerology of the carrier.

A resource block 806 may comprise 12 subcarriers. Multiple resourceblocks may be grouped into a Resource Block Group (RBG) 804. A size of aRBG may depend on at least one of: a RRC message indicating a RBG sizeconfiguration; a size of a carrier bandwidth; and/or a size of abandwidth part of a carrier. A carrier may comprise multiple bandwidthparts. A first bandwidth part of a carrier may have a differentfrequency location and/or a different bandwidth from a second bandwidthpart of the carrier.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, adownlink control information comprising a downlink or uplink resourceblock assignment. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to and/orreceive from, a wireless device, data packets (e.g., transport blocks).The data packets may be scheduled on and transmitted via one or moreresource blocks and one or more slots indicated by parameters indownlink control information and/or RRC message(s). A starting symbolrelative to a first slot of the one or more slots may be indicated tothe wireless device. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to and/orreceive from, a wireless device, data packets. The data packets may bescheduled for transmission on one or more RBGs and in one or more slots.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, downlinkcontrol information comprising a downlink assignment. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) the DCI via one or more PDCCHs. The downlinkassignment may comprise parameters indicating at least one of amodulation and coding format; resource allocation; and/or HARQinformation related to the DL-SCH. The resource allocation may compriseparameters of resource block allocation; and/or slot allocation. A basestation may allocate (e.g., dynamically) resources to a wireless device,for example, via a Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) onone or more PDCCHs. The wireless device may monitor the one or morePDCCHs, for example, in order to find possible allocation if itsdownlink reception is enabled. The wireless device may receive one ormore downlink data packets on one or more PDSCH scheduled by the one ormore PDCCHs, for example, if the wireless device successfully detectsthe one or more PDCCHs.

A base station may allocate Configured Scheduling (CS) resources fordown link transmission to a wireless device. The base station may send(e.g., transmit) one or more RRC messages indicating a periodicity ofthe CS grant. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI via a PDCCHaddressed to a Configured Scheduling-RNTI (CS-RNTI) activating the CSresources. The DCI may comprise parameters indicating that the downlinkgrant is a CS grant. The CS grant may be implicitly reused according tothe periodicity defined by the one or more RRC messages. The CS grantmay be implicitly reused, for example, until deactivated.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device via oneor more PDCCHs, downlink control information comprising an uplink grant.The uplink grant may comprise parameters indicating at least one of amodulation and coding format; a resource allocation; and/or HARQinformation related to the UL-SCH. The resource allocation may compriseparameters of resource block allocation; and/or slot allocation. Thebase station may dynamically allocate resources to the wireless devicevia a C-RNTI on one or more PDCCHs. The wireless device may monitor theone or more PDCCHs, for example, in order to find possible resourceallocation. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or moreuplink data packets via one or more PUSCH scheduled by the one or morePDCCHs, for example, if the wireless device successfully detects the oneor more PDCCHs.

The base station may allocate CS resources for uplink data transmissionto a wireless device. The base station may transmit one or more RRCmessages indicating a periodicity of the CS grant. The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) DCI via a PDCCH addressed to a CS-RNTI to activatethe CS resources. The DCI may comprise parameters indicating that theuplink grant is a CS grant. The CS grant may be implicitly reusedaccording to the periodicity defined by the one or more RRC message, TheCS grant may be implicitly reused, for example, until deactivated.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI and/or control signalingvia a PDCCH. The DCI may comprise a format of a plurality of formats.The DCI may comprise downlink and/or uplink scheduling information(e.g., resource allocation information, HARQ related parameters, MCS),request(s) for CSI (e.g., aperiodic CQI reports), request(s) for an SRS,uplink power control commands for one or more cells, one or more timinginformation (e.g., TB transmission/reception timing, HARQ feedbacktiming, etc.), and/or the like. The DCI may indicate an uplink grantcomprising transmission parameters for one or more transport blocks. TheDCI may indicate a downlink assignment indicating parameters forreceiving one or more transport blocks. The DCI may be used by the basestation to initiate a contention-free random access at the wirelessdevice. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI comprising a slotformat indicator (SFI) indicating a slot format. The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) DCI comprising a preemption indication indicatingthe PRB(s) and/or OFDM symbol(s) in which a wireless device may assumeno transmission is intended for the wireless device. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) DCI for group power control of the PUCCH, thePUSCH, and/or an SRS. DCI may correspond to an RNTI. The wireless devicemay obtain an RNTI after or in response to completing the initial access(e.g., C-RNTI). The base station may configure an RNTI for the wireless(e.g., CS-RNTI, TPC-CS-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI,TPC-SRS-RNTI, etc.). The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute)an RNTI (e.g., the wireless device may determine the RA-RNTI based onresources used for transmission of a preamble). An RNTI may have apre-configured value (e.g., P-RNTI or SI-RNTI). The wireless device maymonitor a group common search space which may be used by the basestation for sending (e.g., transmitting) DCIs that are intended for agroup of wireless devices. A group common DCI may correspond to an RNTIwhich is commonly configured for a group of wireless devices. Thewireless device may monitor a wireless device-specific search space. Awireless device specific DCI may correspond to an RNTI configured forthe wireless device.

A communications system (e.g., an NR system) may support a single beamoperation and/or a multi-beam operation. In a multi-beam operation, abase station may perform a downlink beam sweeping to provide coveragefor common control channels and/or downlink SS blocks, which maycomprise at least a PSS, a SSS, and/or PBCH. A wireless device maymeasure quality of a beam pair link using one or more RSs. One or moreSS blocks, or one or more CSI-RS resources (e.g., which may beassociated with a CSI-RS resource index (CRI)), and/or one or moreDM-RSs of a PBCH, may be used as an RS for measuring a quality of a beampair link. The quality of a beam pair link may be based on a referencesignal received power (RSRP) value, a reference signal received quality(RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The basestation may indicate whether an RS resource, used for measuring a beampair link quality, is quasi-co-located (QCLed) with DM-RSs of a controlchannel. An RS resource and DM-RSs of a control channel may be calledQCLed, for example, if channel characteristics from a transmission on anRS to a wireless device, and that from a transmission on a controlchannel to a wireless device, are similar or the same under a configuredcriterion. In a multi-beam operation, a wireless device may perform anuplink beam sweeping to access a cell.

A wireless device may be configured to monitor a PDCCH on one or morebeam pair links simultaneously, for example, depending on a capabilityof the wireless device. This monitoring may increase robustness againstbeam pair link blocking. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one ormore messages to configure the wireless device to monitor the PDCCH onone or more beam pair links in different PDCCH OFDM symbols. A basestation may send (e.g., transmit) higher layer signaling (e.g., RRCsignaling) and/or a MAC CE comprising parameters related to the Rx beamsetting of the wireless device for monitoring the PDCCH on one or morebeam pair links. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) anindication of a spatial QCL assumption between an DL RS antenna port(s)(e.g., a cell-specific CSI-RS, a wireless device-specific CSI-RS, an SSblock, and/or a PBCH with or without DM-RSs of the PBCH) and/or DL RSantenna port(s) for demodulation of a DL control channel. Signaling forbeam indication for a PDCCH may comprise MAC CE signaling, RRCsignaling, DCI signaling, and/or specification-transparent and/orimplicit method, and/or any combination of signaling methods.

A base station may indicate spatial QCL parameters between DL RS antennaport(s) and DM-RS antenna port(s) of a DL data channel, for example, forreception of a unicast DL data channel. The base station may send (e.g.,transmit) DCI (e.g., downlink grants) comprising information indicatingthe RS antenna port(s). The information may indicate RS antenna port(s)that may be QCL-ed with the DM-RS antenna port(s). A different set ofDM-RS antenna port(s) for a DL data channel may be indicated as QCL witha different set of the RS antenna port(s).

FIG. 9A shows an example of beam sweeping in a DL channel. In anRRC_INACTIVE state or RRC_IDLE state, a wireless device may assume thatSS blocks form an SS burst 940, and an SS burst set 950. The SS burstset 950 may have a given periodicity. A base station 120 may send (e.g.,transmit) SS blocks in multiple beams, together forming a SS burst 940,for example, in a multi-beam operation. One or more SS blocks may besent (e.g., transmitted) on one beam. If multiple SS bursts 940 aretransmitted with multiple beams, SS bursts together may form SS burstset 950.

A wireless device may use CSI-RS for estimating a beam quality of a linkbetween a wireless device and a base station, for example, in the multibeam operation. A beam may be associated with a CSI-RS. A wirelessdevice may (e.g., based on a RSRP measurement on CSI-RS) report a beamindex, which may be indicated in a CRI for downlink beam selectionand/or associated with an RSRP value of a beam. A CSI-RS may be sent(e.g., transmitted) on a CSI-RS resource, which may comprise at leastone of: one or more antenna ports and/or one or more time and/orfrequency radio resources. A CSI-RS resource may be configured in acell-specific way such as by common RRC signaling, or in a wirelessdevice-specific way such as by dedicated RRC signaling and/or L1/L2signaling. Multiple wireless devices covered by a cell may measure acell-specific CSI-RS resource. A dedicated subset of wireless devicescovered by a cell may measure a wireless device-specific CSI-RSresource.

A CSI-RS resource may be sent (e.g., transmitted) periodically, usingaperiodic transmission, or using a multi-shot or semi-persistenttransmission. In a periodic transmission in FIG. 9A, a base station 120may send (e.g., transmit) configured CSI-RS resources 940 periodicallyusing a configured periodicity in a time domain. In an aperiodictransmission, a configured CSI-RS resource may be sent (e.g.,transmitted) in a dedicated time slot. In a multi-shot and/orsemi-persistent transmission, a configured CSI-RS resource may be sent(e.g., transmitted) within a configured period. Beams used for CSI-RStransmission may have a different beam width than beams used forSS-blocks transmission.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a beam management procedure, such as in anexample new radio network. The base station 120 and/or the wirelessdevice 110 may perform a downlink L1/L2 beam management procedure. Oneor more of the following downlink L1/L2 beam management procedures maybe performed within one or more wireless devices 110 and one or morebase stations 120. A P1 procedure 910 may be used to enable the wirelessdevice 110 to measure one or more Transmission (Tx) beams associatedwith the base station 120, for example, to support a selection of afirst set of Tx beams associated with the base station 120 and a firstset of Rx beam(s) associated with the wireless device 110. A basestation 120 may sweep a set of different Tx beams, for example, forbeamforming at a base station 120 (such as shown in the top row, in acounter-clockwise direction). A wireless device 110 may sweep a set ofdifferent Rx beams, for example, for beamforming at a wireless device110 (such as shown in the bottom row, in a clockwise direction). A P2procedure 920 may be used to enable a wireless device 110 to measure oneor more Tx beams associated with a base station 120, for example, topossibly change a first set of Tx beams associated with a base station120. A P2 procedure 920 may be performed on a possibly smaller set ofbeams (e.g., for beam refinement) than in the P1 procedure 910. A P2procedure 920 may be a special example of a P1 procedure 910. A P3procedure 930 may be used to enable a wireless device 110 to measure atleast one Tx beam associated with a base station 120, for example, tochange a first set of Rx beams associated with a wireless device 110.

A wireless device 110 may send (e.g., transmit) one or more beammanagement reports to a base station 120. In one or more beam managementreports, a wireless device 110 may indicate one or more beam pairquality parameters comprising one or more of: a beam identification; anRSRP; a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), Channel Quality Indicator(CQI), and/or Rank Indicator (RI) of a subset of configured beams. Basedon one or more beam management reports, the base station 120 may send(e.g., transmit) to a wireless device 110 a signal indicating that oneor more beam pair links are one or more serving beams. The base station120 may send (e.g., transmit) the PDCCH and the PDSCH for a wirelessdevice 110 using one or more serving beams.

A communications network (e.g., a new radio network) may support aBandwidth Adaptation (BA). Receive and/or transmit bandwidths that maybe configured for a wireless device using a BA may not be large. Receiveand/or transmit bandwidth may not be as large as a bandwidth of a cell.Receive and/or transmit bandwidths may be adjustable. A wireless devicemay change receive and/or transmit bandwidths, for example, to reduce(e.g., shrink) the bandwidth(s) at (e.g., during) a period of lowactivity such as to save power. A wireless device may change a locationof receive and/or transmit bandwidths in a frequency domain, forexample, to increase scheduling flexibility. A wireless device maychange a subcarrier spacing, for example, to allow different services.

A Bandwidth Part (BWP) may comprise a subset of a total cell bandwidthof a cell. A base station may configure a wireless device with one ormore BWPs, for example, to achieve a BA. A base station may indicate, toa wireless device, which of the one or more (configured) BWPs is anactive BWP.

FIG. 10 shows an example of BWP configurations. BWPs may be configuredas follows: BWP1 (1010 and 1050) with a width of 40 MHz and subcarrierspacing of 15 kHz; BWP2 (1020 and 1040) with a width of 10 MHz andsubcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; BWP3 1030 with a width of 20 MHz andsubcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. Any number of BWP configurations maycomprise any other width and subcarrier spacing combination.

A wireless device, configured for operation in one or more BWPs of acell, may be configured by one or more higher layers (e.g., RRC layer).The wireless device may be configured for a cell with: a set of one ormore BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs) for reception (e.g., a DL BWP set)in a DL bandwidth by at least one parameter DL-BWP; and a set of one ormore BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs) for transmissions (e.g., UL BWP set)in an UL bandwidth by at least one parameter UL-BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more UL andDL BWP pairs, for example, to enable BA on the PCell. To enable BA onSCells (e.g., for CA), a base station may configure a wireless device atleast with one or more DL BWPs (e.g., there may be none in an UL).

An initial active DL BWP may comprise at least one of a location andnumber of contiguous PRBs, a subcarrier spacing, or a cyclic prefix, forexample, for a control resource set for at least one common searchspace. For operation on the PCell, one or more higher layer parametersmay indicate at least one initial UL BWP for a random access procedure.If a wireless device is configured with a secondary carrier on a primarycell, the wireless device may be configured with an initial BWP forrandom access procedure on a secondary carrier.

A wireless device may expect that a center frequency for a DL BWP may besame as a center frequency for an UL BWP, for example, for unpairedspectrum operation. A base station may semi-statically configure awireless device for a cell with one or more parameters, for example, fora DL BWP or an UL BWP in a set of one or more DL BWPs or one or more ULBWPs, respectively. The one or more parameters may indicate one or moreof following: a subcarrier spacing; a cyclic prefix; a number ofcontiguous PRBs; an index in the set of one or more DL BWPs and/or oneor more UL BWPs; a link between a DL BWP and an UL BWP from a set ofconfigured DL BWPs and UL BWPs; a DCI detection to a PDSCH receptiontiming; a PDSCH reception to a HARQ-ACK transmission timing value; a DCIdetection to a PUSCH transmission timing value; and/or an offset of afirst PRB of a DL bandwidth or an UL bandwidth, respectively, relativeto a first PRB of a bandwidth.

For a DL BWP in a set of one or more DL BWPs on a PCell, a base stationmay configure a wireless device with one or more control resource setsfor at least one type of common search space and/or one wirelessdevice-specific search space. A base station may not configure awireless device without a common search space on a PCell, or on aPSCell, in an active DL BWP. For an UL BWP in a set of one or more ULBWPs, a base station may configure a wireless device with one or moreresource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions.

DCI may comprise a BWP indicator field. The BWP indicator field valuemay indicate an active DL BWP, from a configured DL BWP set, for one ormore DL receptions. The BWP indicator field value may indicate an activeUL BWP, from a configured UL BWP set, for one or more UL transmissions.

For a PCell, a base station may semi-statically configure a wirelessdevice with a default DL BWP among configured DL BWPs. If a wirelessdevice is not provided a default DL BWP, a default BWP may be an initialactive DL BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a timer value for aPCell. A wireless device may start a timer (e.g., a BWP inactivitytimer), for example, if a wireless device detects DCI indicating anactive DL BWP, other than a default DL BWP, for a paired spectrumoperation, and/or if a wireless device detects DCI indicating an activeDL BWP or UL BWP, other than a default DL BWP or UL BWP, for an unpairedspectrum operation. The wireless device may increment the timer by aninterval of a first value (e.g., the first value may be 1 millisecond,0.5 milliseconds, or any other time duration), for example, if thewireless device does not detect DCI at (e.g., during) the interval for apaired spectrum operation or for an unpaired spectrum operation. Thetimer may expire at a time that the timer is equal to the timer value. Awireless device may switch to the default DL BWP from an active DL BWP,for example, if the timer expires.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with oneor more BWPs. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from a firstBWP to a second BWP, for example, after or in response to receiving DCIindicating the second BWP as an active BWP, and/or after or in responseto an expiry of BWP inactivity timer (e.g., the second BWP may be adefault BWP). FIG. 10 shows an example of three BWPs configured, BWP1(1010 and 1050), BWP2 (1020 and 1040), and BWP3 (1030). BWP2 (1020 and1040) may be a default BWP. BWP1 (1010) may be an initial active BWP. Awireless device may switch an active BWP from BWP1 1010 to BWP2 1020,for example, after or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivitytimer. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from BWP2 1020 to BWP31030, for example, after or in response to receiving DCI indicating BWP31030 as an active BWP. Switching an active BWP from BWP3 1030 to BWP21040 and/or from BWP2 1040 to BWP1 1050 may be after or in response toreceiving DCI indicating an active BWP, and/or after or in response toan expiry of BWP inactivity timer.

Wireless device procedures on a secondary cell may be same as on aprimary cell using the timer value for the secondary cell and thedefault DL BWP for the secondary cell, for example, if a wireless deviceis configured for a secondary cell with a default DL BWP amongconfigured DL BWPs and a timer value. A wireless device may use anindicated DL BWP and an indicated UL BWP on a secondary cell as arespective first active DL BWP and first active UL BWP on a secondarycell or carrier, for example, if a base station configures a wirelessdevice with a first active DL BWP and a first active UL BWP on asecondary cell or carrier.

FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B show packet flows using a multi connectivity(e.g., dual connectivity, multi connectivity, tight interworking, and/orthe like). FIG. 11A shows an example of a protocol structure of awireless device 110 (e.g., UE) with CA and/or multi connectivity. FIG.11B shows an example of a protocol structure of multiple base stationswith CA and/or multi connectivity. The multiple base stations maycomprise a master node, MN 1130 (e.g., a master node, a master basestation, a master gNB, a master eNB, and/or the like) and a secondarynode, SN 1150 (e.g., a secondary node, a secondary base station, asecondary gNB, a secondary eNB, and/or the like). A master node 1130 anda secondary node 1150 may co-work to communicate with a wireless device110.

If multi connectivity is configured for a wireless device 110, thewireless device 110, which may support multiple reception and/ortransmission functions in an RRC connected state, may be configured toutilize radio resources provided by multiple schedulers of a multiplebase stations. Multiple base stations may be inter-connected via anon-ideal or ideal backhaul (e.g., Xn interface, X2 interface, and/orthe like). A base station involved in multi connectivity for a certainwireless device may perform at least one of two different roles: a basestation may act as a master base station or act as a secondary basestation. In multi connectivity, a wireless device may be connected toone master base station and one or more secondary base stations. Amaster base station (e.g., the MN 1130) may provide a master cell group(MCG) comprising a primary cell and/or one or more secondary cells for awireless device (e.g., the wireless device 110). A secondary basestation (e.g., the SN 1150) may provide a secondary cell group (SCG)comprising a primary secondary cell (PSCell) and/or one or moresecondary cells for a wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 110).

In multi connectivity, a radio protocol architecture that a bearer usesmay depend on how a bearer is setup. Three different types of bearersetup options may be supported: an MCG bearer, an SCG bearer, and/or asplit bearer. A wireless device may receive and/or send (e.g., transmit)packets of an MCG bearer via one or more cells of the MCG. A wirelessdevice may receive and/or send (e.g., transmit) packets of an SCG bearervia one or more cells of an SCG. Multi-connectivity may indicate havingat least one bearer configured to use radio resources provided by thesecondary base station. Multi-connectivity may or may not be configuredand/or implemented.

A wireless device (e.g., wireless device 110) may send (e.g., transmit)and/or receive: packets of an MCG bearer via an SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP1110), a PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1111), an RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC1114), and a MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1118); packets of a split bearervia an SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1110), a PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1112),one of a master or secondary RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC 1115, SN RLC 1116),and one of a master or secondary MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1118, SN MAC1119); and/or packets of an SCG bearer via an SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP1110), a PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1113), an RLC layer (e.g., SN RLC1117), and a MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1119).

A master base station (e.g., MN 1130) and/or a secondary base station(e.g., SN 1150) may send (e.g., transmit) and/or receive: packets of anMCG bearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1120,SDAP 1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1121,NR PDCP 1142), a master node RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC 1124, MN RLC 1125),and a master node MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1128); packets of an SCGbearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1120, SDAP1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1122, NRPDCP 1143), a secondary node RLC layer (e.g., SN RLC 1146, SN RLC 1147),and a secondary node MAC layer (e.g., SN MAC 1148); packets of a splitbearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1120, SDAP1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1123, NRPDCP 1141), a master or secondary node RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC 1126, SNRLC 1144, SN RLC 1145, MN RLC 1127), and a master or secondary node MAClayer (e.g., MN MAC 1128, SN MAC 1148).

In multi connectivity, a wireless device may configure multiple MACentities, such as one MAC entity (e.g., MN MAC 1118) for a master basestation, and other MAC entities (e.g., SN MAC 1119) for a secondary basestation. In multi-connectivity, a configured set of serving cells for awireless device may comprise two subsets: an MCG comprising servingcells of a master base station, and SCGs comprising serving cells of asecondary base station. For an SCG, one or more of followingconfigurations may be used. At least one cell of an SCG may have aconfigured UL CC and at least one cell of a SCG, named as primarysecondary cell (e.g., PSCell, PCell of SCG, PCell), and may beconfigured with PUCCH resources. If an SCG is configured, there may beat least one SCG bearer or one split bearer. After or upon detection ofa physical layer problem or a random access problem on a PSCell, or anumber of NR RLC retransmissions has been reached associated with theSCG, or after or upon detection of an access problem on a PSCellassociated with (e.g., during) a SCG addition or an SCG change: an RRCconnection re-establishment procedure may not be triggered, ULtransmissions towards cells of an SCG may be stopped, a master basestation may be informed by a wireless device of a SCG failure type, a DLdata transfer over a master base station may be maintained (e.g., for asplit bearer). An NR RLC acknowledged mode (AM) bearer may be configuredfor a split bearer. A PCell and/or a PSCell may not be de-activated. APSCell may be changed with a SCG change procedure (e.g., with securitykey change and a RACH procedure). A bearer type change between a splitbearer and a SCG bearer, and/or simultaneous configuration of a SCG anda split bearer, may or may not be supported.

With respect to interactions between a master base station and asecondary base stations for multi-connectivity, one or more of thefollowing may be used. A master base station and/or a secondary basestation may maintain RRM measurement configurations of a wirelessdevice. A master base station may determine (e.g., based on receivedmeasurement reports, traffic conditions, and/or bearer types) to requesta secondary base station to provide additional resources (e.g., servingcells) for a wireless device. After or upon receiving a request from amaster base station, a secondary base station may create and/or modify acontainer that may result in a configuration of additional serving cellsfor a wireless device (or decide that the secondary base station has noresource available to do so). For a wireless device capabilitycoordination, a master base station may provide (e.g., all or a part of)an AS configuration and wireless device capabilities to a secondary basestation. A master base station and a secondary base station may exchangeinformation about a wireless device configuration such as by using RRCcontainers (e.g., inter-node messages) carried via Xn messages. Asecondary base station may initiate a reconfiguration of the secondarybase station existing serving cells (e.g., PUCCH towards the secondarybase station). A secondary base station may decide which cell is aPSCell within a SCG. A master base station may or may not change contentof RRC configurations provided by a secondary base station. A masterbase station may provide recent (and/or the latest) measurement resultsfor SCG cell(s), for example, if an SCG addition and/or an SCG SCelladdition occurs. A master base station and secondary base stations mayreceive information of SFN and/or subframe offset of each other from anOAM and/or via an Xn interface (e.g., for a purpose of DRX alignmentand/or identification of a measurement gap). Dedicated RRC signaling maybe used for sending required system information of a cell as for CA, forexample, if adding a new SCG SCell, except for an SFN acquired from anMIB of a PSCell of a SCG.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a random access procedure. One or moreevents may trigger a random access procedure. For example, one or moreevents may be at least one of following: initial access from RRC_IDLE,RRC connection re-establishment procedure, handover, DL or UL dataarrival in (e.g., during) a state of RRC_CONNECTED (e.g., if ULsynchronization status is non-synchronized), transition fromRRC_Inactive, and/or request for other system information. A PDCCHorder, a MAC entity, and/or a beam failure indication may initiate arandom access procedure.

A random access procedure may comprise or be one of at least acontention based random access procedure and/or a contention free randomaccess procedure. A contention based random access procedure maycomprise one or more Msg 1 1220 transmissions, one or more Msg2 1230transmissions, one or more Msg3 1240 transmissions, and contentionresolution 1250. A contention free random access procedure may compriseone or more Msg 1 1220 transmissions and one or more Msg2 1230transmissions. One or more of Msg 1 1220, Msg 2 1230, Msg 3 1240, and/orcontention resolution 1250 may be transmitted in the same step. Atwo-step random access procedure, for example, may comprise a firsttransmission (e.g., Msg A) and a second transmission (e.g., Msg B). Thefirst transmission (e.g., Msg A) may comprise transmitting, by awireless device (e.g., wireless device 110) to a base station (e.g.,base station 120), one or more messages indicating an equivalent and/orsimilar contents of Msg1 1220 and Msg3 1240 of a four-step random accessprocedure. The second transmission (e.g., Msg B) may comprisetransmitting, by the base station (e.g., base station 120) to a wirelessdevice (e.g., wireless device 110) after or in response to the firstmessage, one or more messages indicating an equivalent and/or similarcontent of Msg2 1230 and contention resolution 1250 of a four-steprandom access procedure.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit, unicast, multicast, broadcast,etc.), to a wireless device, a RACH configuration 1210 via one or morebeams. The RACH configuration 1210 may comprise one or more parametersindicating at least one of following: an available set of PRACHresources for a transmission of a random access preamble, initialpreamble power (e.g., random access preamble initial received targetpower), an RSRP threshold for a selection of a SS block andcorresponding PRACH resource, a power-ramping factor (e.g., randomaccess preamble power ramping step), a random access preamble index, amaximum number of preamble transmissions, preamble group A and group B,a threshold (e.g., message size) to determine the groups of randomaccess preambles, a set of one or more random access preambles for asystem information request and corresponding PRACH resource(s) (e.g., ifany), a set of one or more random access preambles for a beam failurerecovery procedure and corresponding PRACH resource(s) (e.g., if any), atime window to monitor RA response(s), a time window to monitorresponse(s) on a beam failure recovery procedure, and/or a contentionresolution timer.

The Msg1 1220 may comprise one or more transmissions of a random accesspreamble. For a contention based random access procedure, a wirelessdevice may select an SS block with an RSRP above the RSRP threshold. Ifrandom access preambles group B exists, a wireless device may select oneor more random access preambles from a group A or a group B, forexample, depending on a potential Msg3 1240 size. If a random accesspreambles group B does not exist, a wireless device may select the oneor more random access preambles from a group A. A wireless device mayselect a random access preamble index randomly (e.g., with equalprobability or a normal distribution) from one or more random accesspreambles associated with a selected group. If a base stationsemi-statically configures a wireless device with an association betweenrandom access preambles and SS blocks, the wireless device may select arandom access preamble index randomly with equal probability from one ormore random access preambles associated with a selected SS block and aselected group.

A wireless device may initiate a contention free random accessprocedure, for example, based on a beam failure indication from a lowerlayer. A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless devicewith one or more contention free PRACH resources for a beam failurerecovery procedure associated with at least one of SS blocks and/orCSI-RSs. A wireless device may select a random access preamble indexcorresponding to a selected SS block or a CSI-RS from a set of one ormore random access preambles for a beam failure recovery procedure, forexample, if at least one of the SS blocks with an RSRP above a firstRSRP threshold amongst associated SS blocks is available, and/or if atleast one of CSI-RSs with a RSRP above a second RSRP threshold amongstassociated CSI-RSs is available.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, a random accesspreamble index via PDCCH or RRC for a contention free random accessprocedure. The wireless device may select a random access preambleindex, for example, if a base station does not configure a wirelessdevice with at least one contention free PRACH resource associated withSS blocks or CSI-RS. The wireless device may select the at least one SSblock and/or select a random access preamble corresponding to the atleast one SS block, for example, if a base station configures thewireless device with one or more contention free PRACH resourcesassociated with SS blocks and/or if at least one SS block with a RSRPabove a first RSRP threshold amongst associated SS blocks is available.The wireless device may select the at least one CSI-RS and/or select arandom access preamble corresponding to the at least one CSI-RS, forexample, if a base station configures a wireless device with one or morecontention free PRACH resources associated with CSI-RSs and/or if atleast one CSI-RS with a RSRP above a second RSPR threshold amongst theassociated CSI-RSs is available.

A wireless device may perform one or more Msg1 1220 transmissions, forexample, by sending (e.g., transmitting) the selected random accesspreamble. The wireless device may determine a PRACH occasion from one ormore PRACH occasions corresponding to a selected SS block, for example,if the wireless device selects an SS block and is configured with anassociation between one or more PRACH occasions and/or one or more SSblocks. The wireless device may determine a PRACH occasion from one ormore PRACH occasions corresponding to a selected CSI-RS, for example, ifthe wireless device selects a CSI-RS and is configured with anassociation between one or more PRACH occasions and one or more CSI-RSs.The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), to a base station, aselected random access preamble via a selected PRACH occasions. Thewireless device may determine a transmit power for a transmission of aselected random access preamble at least based on an initial preamblepower and a power-ramping factor. The wireless device may determine anRA-RNTI associated with a selected PRACH occasion in which a selectedrandom access preamble is sent (e.g., transmitted). The wireless devicemay not determine an RA-RNTI for a beam failure recovery procedure. Thewireless device may determine an RA-RNTI at least based on an index of afirst OFDM symbol, an index of a first slot of a selected PRACHoccasions, and/or an uplink carrier index for a transmission of Msg11220.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, a random accessresponse, Msg 2 1230. The wireless device may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a random access response. For a beamfailure recovery procedure, the base station may configure the wirelessdevice with a different time window (e.g., bfr-ResponseWindow) tomonitor response to on a beam failure recovery request. The wirelessdevice may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow orbfr-ResponseWindow) at a start of a first PDCCH occasion, for example,after a fixed duration of one or more symbols from an end of a preambletransmission. If the wireless device sends (e.g., transmits) multiplepreambles, the wireless device may start a time window at a start of afirst PDCCH occasion after a fixed duration of one or more symbols froman end of a first preamble transmission. The wireless device may monitora PDCCH of a cell for at least one random access response identified bya RA-RNTI, or for at least one response to a beam failure recoveryrequest identified by a C-RNTI, at a time that a timer for a time windowis running.

A wireless device may determine that a reception of random accessresponse is successful, for example, if at least one random accessresponse comprises a random access preamble identifier corresponding toa random access preamble sent (e.g., transmitted) by the wirelessdevice. The wireless device may determine that the contention freerandom access procedure is successfully completed, for example, if areception of a random access response is successful. The wireless devicemay determine that a contention free random access procedure issuccessfully complete, for example, if a contention free random accessprocedure is triggered for a beam failure recovery request and if aPDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The wireless device maydetermine that the random access procedure is successfully completed,and may indicate a reception of an acknowledgement for a systeminformation request to upper layers, for example, if at least one randomaccess response comprises a random access preamble identifier. Thewireless device may stop sending (e.g., transmitting) remainingpreambles (if any) after or in response to a successful reception of acorresponding random access response, for example, if the wirelessdevice has signaled multiple preamble transmissions.

The wireless device may perform one or more Msg 3 1240 transmissions,for example, after or in response to a successful reception of randomaccess response (e.g., for a contention based random access procedure).The wireless device may adjust an uplink transmission timing, forexample, based on a timing advanced command indicated by a random accessresponse. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or moretransport blocks, for example, based on an uplink grant indicated by arandom access response. Subcarrier spacing for PUSCH transmission forMsg3 1240 may be provided by at least one higher layer (e.g., RRC)parameter. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble via a PRACH, and Msg3 1240 via PUSCH, on the same cell. A basestation may indicate an UL BWP for a PUSCH transmission of Msg3 1240 viasystem information block. The wireless device may use HARQ for aretransmission of Msg 3 1240.

Multiple wireless devices may perform Msg 1 1220, for example, bysending (e.g., transmitting) the same preamble to a base station. Themultiple wireless devices may receive, from the base station, the samerandom access response comprising an identity (e.g., TC-RNTI).Contention resolution (e.g., comprising the wireless device 110receiving contention resolution 1250) may be used to increase thelikelihood that a wireless device does not incorrectly use an identityof another wireless device. The contention resolution 1250 may be basedon, for example, a C-RNTI on a PDCCH, and/or a wireless devicecontention resolution identity on a DL-SCH. If a base station assigns aC-RNTI to a wireless device, the wireless device may perform contentionresolution (e.g., comprising receiving contention resolution 1250), forexample, based on a reception of a PDCCH transmission that is addressedto the C-RNTI. The wireless device may determine that contentionresolution is successful, and/or that a random access procedure issuccessfully completed, for example, after or in response to detecting aC-RNTI on a PDCCH. If a wireless device has no valid C-RNTI, acontention resolution may be addressed by using a TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDUis successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises a wireless devicecontention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwisecorresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g., transmitted) in Msg3 1250, thewireless device may determine that the contention resolution (e.g.,comprising contention resolution 1250) is successful and/or the wirelessdevice may determine that the random access procedure is successfullycompleted.

FIG. 13 shows an example structure for MAC entities. A wireless devicemay be configured to operate in a multi-connectivity mode. A wirelessdevice in RRC_CONNECTED with multiple Rx/Tx may be configured to utilizeradio resources provided by multiple schedulers that may be located in aplurality of base stations. The plurality of base stations may beconnected via a non-ideal or ideal backhaul over the Xn interface. Abase station in a plurality of base stations may act as a master basestation or as a secondary base station. A wireless device may beconnected to and/or in communication with, for example, one master basestation and one or more secondary base stations. A wireless device maybe configured with multiple MAC entities, for example, one MAC entityfor a master base station, and one or more other MAC entities forsecondary base station(s). A configured set of serving cells for awireless device may comprise two subsets: an MCG comprising servingcells of a master base station, and one or more SCGs comprising servingcells of a secondary base station(s). FIG. 13 shows an example structurefor MAC entities in which a MCG and a SCG are configured for a wirelessdevice.

At least one cell in a SCG may have a configured UL CC. A cell of the atleast one cell may comprise a PSCell or a PCell of a SCG, or a PCell. APSCell may be configured with PUCCH resources. There may be at least oneSCG bearer, or one split bearer, for a SCG that is configured. After orupon detection of a physical layer problem or a random access problem ona PSCell, after or upon reaching a number of RLC retransmissionsassociated with the SCG, and/or after or upon detection of an accessproblem on a PSCell associated with (e.g., during) a SCG addition or aSCG change: an RRC connection re-establishment procedure may not betriggered, UL transmissions towards cells of a SCG may be stopped,and/or a master base station may be informed by a wireless device of aSCG failure type and DL data transfer over a master base station may bemaintained.

A MAC sublayer may provide services such as data transfer and radioresource allocation to upper layers (e.g., 1310 or 1320). A MAC sublayermay comprise a plurality of MAC entities (e.g., 1350 and 1360). A MACsublayer may provide data transfer services on logical channels. Toaccommodate different kinds of data transfer services, multiple types oflogical channels may be defined. A logical channel may support transferof a particular type of information. A logical channel type may bedefined by what type of information (e.g., control or data) istransferred. BCCH, PCCH, CCCH and/or DCCH may be control channels, andDTCH may be a traffic channel. A first MAC entity (e.g., 1310) mayprovide services on PCCH, BCCH, CCCH, DCCH, DTCH, and/or MAC controlelements. A second MAC entity (e.g., 1320) may provide services on BCCH,DCCH, DTCH, and/or MAC control elements.

A MAC sublayer may expect from a physical layer (e.g., 1330 or 1340)services such as data transfer services, signaling of HARQ feedback,and/or signaling of scheduling request or measurements (e.g., CQI). Indual connectivity, two MAC entities may be configured for a wirelessdevice: one for a MCG and one for a SCG. A MAC entity of a wirelessdevice may handle a plurality of transport channels. A first MAC entitymay handle first transport channels comprising a PCCH of a MCG, a firstBCH of the MCG, one or more first DL-SCHs of the MCG, one or more firstUL-SCHs of the MCG, and/or one or more first RACHs of the MCG. A secondMAC entity may handle second transport channels comprising a second BCHof a SCG, one or more second DL-SCHs of the SCG, one or more secondUL-SCHs of the SCG, and/or one or more second RACHs of the SCG.

If a MAC entity is configured with one or more SCells, there may bemultiple DL-SCHs, multiple UL-SCHs, and/or multiple RACHs per MACentity. There may be one DL-SCH and/or one UL-SCH on an SpCell. Theremay be one DL-SCH, zero or one UL-SCH, and/or zero or one RACH for anSCell. A DL-SCH may support receptions using different numerologiesand/or TTI duration within a MAC entity. An UL-SCH may supporttransmissions using different numerologies and/or TTI duration withinthe MAC entity.

A MAC sublayer may support different functions. The MAC sublayer maycontrol these functions with a control (e.g., Control 1355 and/orControl 1365) element. Functions performed by a MAC entity may compriseone or more of: mapping between logical channels and transport channels(e.g., in uplink or downlink), multiplexing (e.g., (De-) Multiplexing1352 and/or (De-) Multiplexing 1362) of MAC SDUs from one or differentlogical channels onto transport blocks (TBs) to be delivered to thephysical layer on transport channels (e.g., in uplink), demultiplexing(e.g., (De-) Multiplexing 1352 and/or (De-) Multiplexing 1362) of MACSDUs to one or different logical channels from transport blocks (TBs)delivered from the physical layer on transport channels (e.g., indownlink), scheduling information reporting (e.g., in uplink), errorcorrection through HARQ in uplink and/or downlink (e.g., 1363), andlogical channel prioritization in uplink (e.g., Logical ChannelPrioritization 1351 and/or Logical Channel Prioritization 1361). A MACentity may handle a random access process (e.g., Random Access Control1354 and/or Random Access Control 1364).

FIG. 14 shows an example of a RAN architecture comprising one or morebase stations. A protocol stack (e.g., RRC, SDAP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and/orPHY) may be supported at a node. A base station (e.g., gNB 120A and/or120B) may comprise a base station central unit (CU) (e.g., gNB-CU 1420Aor 1420B) and at least one base station distributed unit (DU) (e.g.,gNB-DU 1430A, 1430B, 1430C, and/or 1430D), for example, if a functionalsplit is configured. Upper protocol layers of a base station may belocated in a base station CU, and lower layers of the base station maybe located in the base station DUs. An F1 interface (e.g., CU-DUinterface) connecting a base station CU and base station DUs may be anideal or non-ideal backhaul. F1-C may provide a control plane connectionover an F1 interface, and F1-U may provide a user plane connection overthe F1 interface. An Xn interface may be configured between base stationCUs.

A base station CU may comprise an RRC function, an SDAP layer, and/or aPDCP layer. Base station DUs may comprise an RLC layer, a MAC layer,and/or a PHY layer. Various functional split options between a basestation CU and base station DUs may be possible, for example, bylocating different combinations of upper protocol layers (e.g., RANfunctions) in a base station CU and different combinations of lowerprotocol layers (e.g., RAN functions) in base station DUs. A functionalsplit may support flexibility to move protocol layers between a basestation CU and base station DUs, for example, depending on servicerequirements and/or network environments.

Functional split options may be configured per base station, per basestation CU, per base station DU, per wireless device, per bearer, perslice, and/or with other granularities. In a per base station CU split,a base station CU may have a fixed split option, and base station DUsmay be configured to match a split option of a base station CU. In a perbase station DU split, a base station DU may be configured with adifferent split option, and a base station CU may provide differentsplit options for different base station DUs. In a per wireless devicesplit, a base station (e.g., a base station CU and at least one basestation DUs) may provide different split options for different wirelessdevices. In a per bearer split, different split options may be utilizedfor different bearers. In a per slice splice, different split optionsmay be used for different slices.

FIG. 15 shows example RRC state transitions of a wireless device. Awireless device may be in at least one RRC state among an RRC connectedstate (e.g., RRC Connected 1530, RRC_Connected, etc.), an RRC idle state(e.g., RRC Idle 1510, RRC_Idle, etc.), and/or an RRC inactive state(e.g., RRC Inactive 1520, RRC_Inactive, etc.). In an RRC connectedstate, a wireless device may have at least one RRC connection with atleast one base station (e.g., gNB and/or eNB), which may have a contextof the wireless device (e.g., UE context). A wireless device context(e.g., UE context) may comprise at least one of an access stratumcontext, one or more radio link configuration parameters, bearer (e.g.,data radio bearer (DRB), signaling radio bearer (SRB), logical channel,QoS flow, PDU session, and/or the like) configuration information,security information, PHY/MAC/RLC/PDCP/SDAP layer configurationinformation, and/or the like configuration information for a wirelessdevice. In an RRC idle state, a wireless device may not have an RRCconnection with a base station, and a context of the wireless device maynot be stored in a base station. In an RRC inactive state, a wirelessdevice may not have an RRC connection with a base station. A context ofa wireless device may be stored in a base station, which may comprise ananchor base station (e.g., a last serving base station).

A wireless device may transition an RRC state (e.g., UE RRC state)between an RRC idle state and an RRC connected state in both ways (e.g.,connection release 1540 or connection establishment 1550; and/orconnection reestablishment) and/or between an RRC inactive state and anRRC connected state in both ways (e.g., connection inactivation 1570 orconnection resume 1580). A wireless device may transition its RRC statefrom an RRC inactive state to an RRC idle state (e.g., connectionrelease 1560).

An anchor base station may be a base station that may keep a context ofa wireless device (e.g., UE context) at least at (e.g., during) a timeperiod that the wireless device stays in a RAN notification area (RNA)of an anchor base station, and/or at (e.g., during) a time period thatthe wireless device stays in an RRC inactive state. An anchor basestation may comprise a base station that a wireless device in an RRCinactive state was most recently connected to in a latest RRC connectedstate, and/or a base station in which a wireless device most recentlyperformed an RNA update procedure. An RNA may comprise one or more cellsoperated by one or more base stations. A base station may belong to oneor more RNAs. A cell may belong to one or more RNAs.

A wireless device may transition, in a base station, an RRC state (e.g.,UE RRC state) from an RRC connected state to an RRC inactive state. Thewireless device may receive RNA information from the base station. RNAinformation may comprise at least one of an RNA identifier, one or morecell identifiers of one or more cells of an RNA, a base stationidentifier, an IP address of the base station, an AS context identifierof the wireless device, a resume identifier, and/or the like.

An anchor base station may broadcast a message (e.g., RAN pagingmessage) to base stations of an RNA to reach to a wireless device in anRRC inactive state. The base stations receiving the message from theanchor base station may broadcast and/or multicast another message(e.g., paging message) to wireless devices in their coverage area, cellcoverage area, and/or beam coverage area associated with the RNA via anair interface.

A wireless device may perform an RNA update (RNAU) procedure, forexample, if the wireless device is in an RRC inactive state and movesinto a new RNA. The RNAU procedure may comprise a random accessprocedure by the wireless device and/or a context retrieve procedure(e.g., UE context retrieve). A context retrieve procedure may comprise:receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, a random accesspreamble; and requesting and/or receiving (e.g., fetching), by a basestation, a context of the wireless device (e.g., UE context) from an oldanchor base station. The requesting and/or receiving (e.g., fetching)may comprise: sending a retrieve context request message (e.g., UEcontext request message) comprising a resume identifier to the oldanchor base station and receiving a retrieve context response messagecomprising the context of the wireless device from the old anchor basestation.

A wireless device in an RRC inactive state may select a cell to camp onbased on at least a measurement result for one or more cells, a cell inwhich a wireless device may monitor an RNA paging message, and/or a corenetwork paging message from a base station. A wireless device in an RRCinactive state may select a cell to perform a random access procedure toresume an RRC connection and/or to send (e.g., transmit) one or morepackets to a base station (e.g., to a network). The wireless device mayinitiate a random access procedure to perform an RNA update procedure,for example, if a cell selected belongs to a different RNA from an RNAfor the wireless device in an RRC inactive state. The wireless devicemay initiate a random access procedure to send (e.g., transmit) one ormore packets to a base station of a cell that the wireless deviceselects, for example, if the wireless device is in an RRC inactive stateand has one or more packets (e.g., in a buffer) to send (e.g., transmit)to a network. A random access procedure may be performed with twomessages (e.g., 2-stage or 2-step random access) and/or four messages(e.g., 4-stage or 4-step random access) between the wireless device andthe base station.

A base station receiving one or more uplink packets from a wirelessdevice in an RRC inactive state may request and/or receive (e.g., fetch)a context of a wireless device (e.g., UE context), for example, bysending (e.g., transmitting) a retrieve context request message for thewireless device to an anchor base station of the wireless device basedon at least one of an AS context identifier, an RNA identifier, a basestation identifier, a resume identifier, and/or a cell identifierreceived from the wireless device. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit) a path switch request for a wireless device to a core networkentity (e.g., AMF, MME, and/or the like), for example, after or inresponse to requesting and/or receiving (e.g., fetching) a context. Acore network entity may update a downlink tunnel endpoint identifier forone or more bearers established for the wireless device between a userplane core network entity (e.g., UPF, S-GW, and/or the like) and a RANnode (e.g., the base station), such as by changing a downlink tunnelendpoint identifier from an address of the anchor base station to anaddress of the base station).

A base station may communicate with a wireless device via a wirelessnetwork using one or more technologies, such as new radio technologies(e.g., NR, 5G, etc.). The one or more radio technologies may comprise atleast one of: multiple technologies related to physical layer; multipletechnologies related to medium access control layer; and/or multipletechnologies related to radio resource control layer. Enhancing the oneor more radio technologies may improve performance of a wirelessnetwork. System throughput, and/or data rate of transmission, may beincreased. Battery consumption of a wireless device may be reduced.Latency of data transmission between a base station and a wirelessdevice may be improved. Network coverage of a wireless network may beimproved. Transmission efficiency of a wireless network may be improved.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI via a PDCCH for at leastone of: a scheduling assignment and/or grant; a slot formatnotification; a preemption indication; and/or a power-control command.The DCI may comprise at least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; adownlink scheduling assignment(s); an uplink scheduling grant(s); a slotformat indicator; a preemption indication; a power-control forPUCCH/PUSCH; and/or a power-control for SRS.

A downlink scheduling assignment DCI may comprise parameters indicatingat least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a PDSCH resourceindication; a transport format; HARQ information; control informationrelated to multiple antenna schemes; and/or a command for power controlof the PUCCH. An uplink scheduling grant DCI may comprise parametersindicating at least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a PUSCHresource indication; a transport format; HARQ related information;and/or a power control command of the PUSCH.

Different types of control information may correspond to different DCImessage sizes. Supporting multiple beams, spatial multiplexing in thespatial domain, and/or noncontiguous allocation of RBs in the frequencydomain, may require a larger scheduling message, in comparison with anuplink grant allowing for frequency-contiguous allocation. DCI may becategorized into different DCI formats. A DCI format may correspond to acertain message size and/or usage.

A wireless device may monitor (e.g., in common search space or wirelessdevice-specific search space) one or more PDCCH for detecting one ormore DCI with one or more DCI format. A wireless device may monitor aPDCCH with a limited set of DCI formats, for example, which may reducepower consumption. The more DCI formats that are to be detected, themore power may be consumed by the wireless device.

The information in the DCI formats for downlink scheduling may compriseat least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a carrier indicator; anRB allocation; a time resource allocation; a bandwidth part indicator; aHARQ process number; one or more MCS; one or more NDI; one or more RV;MIMO related information; a downlink assignment index (DAI); a TPC forPUCCH; an SRS request; and/or padding (e.g., if necessary). The MIMOrelated information may comprise at least one of: a PMI; precodinginformation; a transport block swap flag; a power offset between PDSCHand a reference signal; a reference-signal scrambling sequence; a numberof layers; antenna ports for the transmission; and/or a transmissionconfiguration indication (TCI).

The information in the DCI formats used for uplink scheduling maycomprise at least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a carrierindicator; a bandwidth part indication; a resource allocation type; anRB allocation; a time resource allocation; an MCS; an NDI; a phaserotation of the uplink DMRS; precoding information; a CSI request; anSRS request; an uplink index/DAI; a TPC for PUSCH; and/or padding (e.g.,if necessary).

A base station may perform CRC scrambling for DCI, for example, beforetransmitting the DCI via a PDCCH. The base station may perform CRCscrambling by binarily adding multiple bits of at least one wirelessdevice identifier (e.g., C-RNTI, CS-RNTI, TPC-CS-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI,TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, SP CSI C-RNTI, and/or TPC-SRS-RNTI) on the CRC bits ofthe DCI. The wireless device may check the CRC bits of the DCI, forexample, if detecting the DCI. The wireless device may receive the DCI,for example, if the CRC is scrambled by a sequence of bits that is thesame as the at least one wireless device identifier.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more PDCCH in differentCORESETs, for example, to support a wide bandwidth operation. A basestation may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising configurationparameters of one or more CORESETs. A CORESET may comprise at least oneof: a first OFDM symbol; a number of consecutive OFDM symbols; a set ofresource blocks; and/or a CCE-to-REG mapping. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a PDCCH in a dedicated CORESET for particular purpose,for example, for beam failure recovery confirmation. A wireless devicemay monitor a PDCCH for detecting DCI in one or more configuredCORESETs, for example, to reduce the power consumption.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more MAC PDUs to awireless device. A MAC PDU may comprise a bit string that may be bytealigned (e.g., multiple of eight bits) in length. Bit strings may berepresented by tables in which the most significant bit is the leftmostbit of the first line of the table, and the least significant bit is therightmost bit on the last line of the table. The bit string may be readfrom the left to right, and then, in the reading order of the lines. Thebit order of a parameter field within a MAC PDU may be represented withthe first and most significant bit in the leftmost bit, and with thelast and least significant bit in the rightmost bit.

A MAC SDU may comprise a bit string that is byte aligned (e.g., multipleof eight bits) in length. A MAC SDU may be included in a MAC PDU, forexample, from the first bit onward. In an example, a MAC CE may be a bitstring that is byte aligned (e.g., multiple of eight bits) in length. AMAC subheader may be a bit string that is byte aligned (e.g., multipleof eight bits) in length. A MAC subheader may be placed immediately infront of the corresponding MAC SDU, MAC CE, and/or padding. A MAC entitymay ignore a value of reserved bits in a DL MAC PDU.

A MAC PDU may comprise one or more MAC subPDUs. A MAC subPDU of the oneor more MAC subPDUs may comprise at least one of: a MAC subheader only(e.g., including padding); a MAC subheader and a MAC SDU; a MACsubheader and a MAC CE; and/or a MAC subheader and padding. The MAC SDUmay be of variable size. A MAC subheader may correspond to a MAC SDU, aMAC CE, and/or padding.

A MAC subheader may comprise: an R field comprising one bit; an F fieldwith one bit in length; an LCID field with multiple bits in length; an Lfield with multiple bits in length, for example, if the MAC subheadercorresponds to a MAC SDU, a variable-sized MAC CE, and/or padding.

FIG. 16A shows an example of a MAC subheader comprising an eight-bit Lfield. The LCID field may have six bits in length. The L field may haveeight bits in length.

FIG. 16B shows an example of a MAC subheader with a sixteen-bit L field.The LCID field may have six bits in length. The L field may have sixteenbits in length. A MAC subheader may comprise: a R field comprising twobits in length; and an LCID field comprising multiple bits in length(e.g., if the MAC subheader corresponds to a fixed sized MAC CE), and/orpadding.

FIG. 16C shows an example of the MAC subheader. The LCID field maycomprise six bits in length, and the R field may comprise two bits inlength.

FIG. 17A shows an example of a DL MAC PDU. Multiple MAC CEs may beplaced together. A MAC subPDU comprising MAC CE may be placed before anyMAC subPDU comprising a MAC SDU, and/or before a MAC subPDU comprisingpadding.

FIG. 17B shows an example of an UL MAC PDU. Multiple MAC CEs may beplaced together. A MAC subPDU comprising a MAC CE may be placed afterall MAC subPDU comprising a MAC SDU. The MAC subPDU may be placed beforea MAC subPDU comprising padding.

FIG. 18 shows first examples of LCIDs. FIG. 19 shows second examples ofLCIDs. In each of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the left columns compriseindices, and the right columns comprises corresponding LCID values foreach index.

FIG. 18 shows an example of an LCID that may be associated with the oneor more MAC CEs. A MAC entity of a base station may send (e.g.,transmit) to a MAC entity of a wireless device one or more MAC CEs. Theone or more MAC CEs may comprise at least one of: an SP ZP CSI-RSResource Set Activation/Deactivation MAC CE; a PUCCH spatial relationActivation/Deactivation MAC CE; a SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE;a SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE; a TCI StateIndication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC CE; a TCI State Indication forUE-specific PDSCH MAC CE; an Aperiodic CSI Trigger State SubselectionMAC CE; a SP CSI-RS/CSI-IM Resource Set Activation/Deactivation MAC CE;a wireless device (e.g., UE) contention resolution identity MAC CE; atiming advance command MAC CE; a DRX command MAC CE; a long DRX commandMAC CE; an SCell activation and/or deactivation MAC CE (e.g., 1 Octet);an SCell activation and/or deactivation MAC CE (e.g., 4 Octet); and/or aduplication activation and/or deactivation MAC CE. A MAC CE may comprisean LCID in the corresponding MAC subheader. Different MAC CEs may havedifferent LCID in the corresponding MAC subheader. An LCID with 111011in a MAC subheader may indicate a MAC CE associated with the MACsubheader is a long DRX command MAC CE.

FIG. 19 shows further examples of LCIDs associated with one or more MACCEs. The MAC entity of the wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), tothe MAC entity of the base station, one or more MAC CEs. The one or moreMAC CEs may comprise at least one of: a short buffer status report (BSR)MAC CE; a long BSR MAC CE; a C-RNTI MAC CE; a configured grantconfirmation MAC CE; a single entry power headroom report (PHR) MAC CE;a multiple entry PHR MAC CE; a short truncated BSR; and/or a longtruncated BSR. A MAC CE may comprise an LCID in the corresponding MACsubheader. Different MAC CEs may have different LCIDs in thecorresponding MAC subheader. The LCID with 111011 in a MAC subheader mayindicate a MAC CE associated with the MAC subheader is a short-truncatedcommand MAC CE.

Two or more component carriers (CCs) may be aggregated, for example, ina carrier aggregation (CA). A wireless device may simultaneously receiveand/or transmit on one or more CCs, for example, depending oncapabilities of the wireless device. The CA may be supported forcontiguous CCs. The CA may be supported for non-contiguous CCs.

A wireless device may have one RRC connection with a network, forexample, if configured with CA. At (e.g., during) an RRC connectionestablishment, re-establishment and/or handover, a cell providing a NASmobility information may be a serving cell. At (e.g., during) an RRCconnection re-establishment and/or handover procedure, a cell providinga security input may be a serving cell. The serving cell may be referredto as a primary cell (PCell). A base station may send (e.g., transmit),to a wireless device, one or more messages comprising configurationparameters of a plurality of one or more secondary cells (SCells), forexample, depending on capabilities of the wireless device.

A base station and/or a wireless device may use an activation and/ordeactivation mechanism of an SCell for an efficient battery consumption,for example, if the base station and/or the wireless device isconfigured with CA. A base station may activate or deactivate at leastone of the one or more SCells, for example, if the wireless device isconfigured with one or more SCells. The SCell may be deactivated, forexample, after or upon configuration of an SCell.

A wireless device may activate and/or deactivate an SCell, for example,after or in response to receiving an SCell activation and/ordeactivation MAC CE. A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to awireless device, one or more messages comprising ansCellDeactivationTimer timer. The wireless device may deactivate anSCell, for example, after or in response to an expiry of thesCellDeactivationTimer timer.

A wireless device may activate an SCell, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE activating anSCell. The wireless device may perform operations (e.g., after or inresponse to the activating the SCell) that may comprise: SRStransmissions on the SCell; CQI, PMI, RI, and/or CRI reporting for theSCell on a PCell; PDCCH monitoring on the SCell; PDCCH monitoring forthe SCell on the PCell; and/or PUCCH transmissions on the SCell.

The wireless device may start and/or restart a timer (e.g., ansCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with the SCell, for example,after or in response to activating the SCell. The wireless device maystart the timer (e.g., sCellDeactivationTimer timer) in the slot, forexample, if the SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE has been received.The wireless device may initialize and/or re-initialize one or moresuspended configured uplink grants of a configured grant Type 1associated with the SCell according to a stored configuration, forexample, after or in response to activating the SCell. The wirelessdevice may trigger a PHR, for example, after or in response toactivating the SCell.

The wireless device may deactivate the activated SCell, for example, ifthe wireless device receives an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CEdeactivating an activated SCell. The wireless device may deactivate theactivated SCell, for example, if a timer (e.g., ansCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with an activated SCellexpires. The wireless device may stop the timer (e.g.,sCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with the activated SCell, forexample, after or in response to deactivating the activated SCell. Thewireless device may clear one or more configured downlink assignmentsand/or one or more configured uplink grant Type 2 associated with theactivated SCell, for example, after or in response to the deactivatingthe activated SCell. The wireless device may suspend one or moreconfigured uplink grant Type 1 associated with the activated SCell, forexample, after or in response to deactivating the activated SCell. Thewireless device may flush HARQ buffers associated with the activatedSCell.

A wireless device may not perform certain operations, for example, if anSCell is deactivated. The wireless device may not perform one or more ofthe following operations if an SCell is deactivated: transmitting SRS onthe SCell; reporting CQI, PMI, RI, and/or CRI for the SCell on a PCell;transmitting on UL-SCH on the SCell; transmitting on a RACH on theSCell; monitoring at least one first PDCCH on the SCell; monitoring atleast one second PDCCH for the SCell on the PCell; and/or transmitting aPUCCH on the SCell.

A wireless device may restart a timer (e.g., an sCellDeactivationTimertimer) associated with the activated SCell, for example, if at least onefirst PDCCH on an activated SCell indicates an uplink grant or adownlink assignment. A wireless device may restart a timer (e.g., ansCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with the activated SCell, forexample, if at least one second PDCCH on a serving cell (e.g. a PCell oran SCell configured with PUCCH, such as a PUCCH SCell) scheduling theactivated SCell indicates an uplink grant and/or a downlink assignmentfor the activated SCell. A wireless device may abort the ongoing randomaccess procedure on the SCell, for example, if an SCell is deactivatedand/or if there is an ongoing random access procedure on the SCell.

FIG. 20A shows an example of an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CEthat may comprise one octet. A first MAC PDU subheader comprising afirst LCID may identify the SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of oneoctet. An SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of one octet may have afixed size. The SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of one octet maycomprise a single octet. The single octet may comprise a first number ofC-fields (e.g., seven) and a second number of R-fields (e.g., one).

FIG. 20B shows an example of an SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE offour octets. A second MAC PDU subheader with a second LCID may identifythe SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE of four octets. An SCellactivation/deactivation MAC CE of four octets may have a fixed size. TheSCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of four octets may comprise fouroctets. The four octets may comprise a third number of C-fields (e.g.,31) and a fourth number of R-fields (e.g., 1). A C_(i) field mayindicate an activation/deactivation status of an SCell with an SCellindex i, for example, if an SCell with SCell index i is configured. AnSCell with an SCell index i may be activated, for example, if the C_(i)field is set to one. An SCell with an SCell index i may be deactivated,for example, if the C_(i) field is set to zero. The wireless device mayignore the C_(i) field, for example, if there is no SCell configuredwith SCell index i. An R field may indicate a reserved bit. The R fieldmay be set to zero.

A base station may configure a wireless device with uplink (UL)bandwidth parts (BWPs) and downlink (DL) BWPs, for example, to enablebandwidth adaptation (BA) for a PCell. The base station may configurethe wireless device with at least DL BWP(s) (e.g., an SCell may not haveUL BWPS) to enable BA for an SCell, for example, if CA is configured.For the PCell, an initial BWP may be a first BWP used for initialaccess. For the SCell, a first active BWP may be a second BWP configuredfor the wireless device to first operate on the SCell if the SCell isactivated.

A base station and/or a wireless device may switch a DL BWP and an ULBWP independently, for example, in paired spectrum (e.g., FDD). A basestation and/or a wireless device may switch a DL BWP and an UL BWPsimultaneously, for example, in unpaired spectrum (e.g., TDD). Switchingbetween configured BWPs may be based on DCI and/or an inactivity timer.The base station and/or the wireless device may switch an active BWP toa default BWP, for example, based on or in response to an expiry of theinactivity timer associated with a cell (e.g., if the inactivity timeris configured for a serving cell). The default BWP may be configured bythe network.

One UL BWP for each uplink carrier and one DL BWP may be active at atime in an active serving cell, for example, in FDD systems configuredwith BA. One DL/UL BWP pair may be active at a time in an active servingcell, for example, in TDD systems. Operating on the one UL BWP and theone DL BWP (and/or the one DL/UL pair) may enable a wireless device touse a reasonable amount of power (e.g., reasonable battery consumption).BWPs other than the one UL BWP and the one DL BWP that the wirelessdevice may be configured with may be deactivated. The wireless devicemay refrain from monitoring a PDCCH, and/or may refrain fromtransmitting via a PUCCH, PRACH and/or UL-SCH, for example, ondeactivated BWPs.

A serving cell may be configured with a first number (e.g., four) ofBWPs. A wireless device and/or a base station may have one active BWP atany point in time, for example, for an activated serving cell. A BWPswitching for a serving cell may be used to activate an inactive BWPand/or deactivate an active BWP. The BWP switching may be controlled bya PDCCH indicating a downlink assignment or an uplink grant. The BWPswitching may be controlled by an inactivity timer (e.g.,bandwidthpartInactivityTimer). The BWP switching may be controlled by aMAC entity, for example, based on initiating a random access procedure.A BWP may be initially active without receiving a PDCCH indicating adownlink assignment or an uplink grant, for example, based on anaddition of an SpCell or an activation of an SCell. The active BWP for aserving cell may be indicated by an RRC message and/or a PDCCH message(e.g., PDCCH order). A DL BWP may be paired with an UL BWP, and/or BWPswitching may be common for both UL and DL, for example, for unpairedspectrum.

FIG. 21 shows an example of BWP switching. The BWP switching may be on aPCell. A base station 2102 may send (e.g., transmit) one or moremessages (e.g., one or more RRC messages) 2112 for configuring multipleBWPs (e.g., multiple BWPs comprising a DL BWP 0, a DL BWP 1, a DL BWP 2,a DL BWP 3, an UL BWP 0, an UL BWP 1, an UL BWP 2, and an UL BWP 3 shownin a table 2108). The DL (and/or UL) BWP 0 may be a default BWP. The DL(and/or UL) BWP 1 may be an initial active BWP (e.g., an initial DL BWPor an initial UL BWP). A wireless device 2104 may determine the multipleBWPs configured for the wireless device 2104, for example, based on theone or more messages 2112. The base station 2102 may send DCI 2114 for aDL assignment (e.g., at a time n). The DCI 2114 may be sent via the DLBWP 1 (e.g., an initial DL BWP). The wireless device 2104 may receive apacket via the DL BWP 1 or via another active DL BWP (e.g., at a timen+k), for example, based on the DL assignment. The wireless device 2104may start a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at the time n+k). The wirelessdevice 2104 may start the BWP inactivity timer, for example, afterreceiving scheduled downlink packets. The base station 2102 may send DCI2114 for an UL grant (e.g., at the time n). The DCI 2114 may be sent viathe DL BWP 1 (e.g., a first DL BWP or an initial DL BWP). The wirelessdevice 2104 may send a packet via an UL BWP 1 (e.g., via a first UL BWPor an initial UL BWP at a time n+k), for example, based on the UL grant.The wireless device 2104 may start a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at thetime n+k). The wireless device 2104 may start the BWP inactivity timer,for example, after sending scheduled uplink packets.

The base station 2102 may send DCI 2116 for BWP switching (e.g., a BWPswitching from the DL BWP 1 to the DL BWP 2). The DCI 2116 may be sentvia the active DL BWP 1 (e.g., at a time m). The wireless device 2104may receive the DCI 2116, for example, by monitoring a PDCCH on theactive DL BWP 1. The wireless device 2104 may switch the DL BWP 1 to theDL BWP 2 (e.g., at a time m+1), for example, based on the DCI 2116.There may be a delay (e.g., a gap) between the wireless device 2104receiving the DCI 2116 and the wireless device 2104 switching to the DLBWP 2. The wireless device 2104 may start and/or re-start the BWPinactivity timer (e.g., at the time m+1), for example, after the BWPswitching. The BWP inactivity timer may expire (e.g., at a time o), forexample, if the wireless device 2104 does not perform reception ortransmission for a period of time (e.g., a period from the time m+1 tothe time o). The wireless device 2104 may switch the DL BWP 2 to the DLBWP 0 (e.g., a default BWP). The fallback to the DL BWP 0 may occur(e.g., at a time o+q), for example, after the BWP inactivity timerexpires. There may be a delay (e.g., a gap) between the BWP timerexpiration (e.g., at a time o) and the wireless device 2104 switching tothe DL BWP 0 (e.g., at a time o+q). BWPs are described as exampleresources, and any wireless resource may be applicable to one or moreprocedures described herein.

FIG. 22 shows an example of BWP switching. The BWP switching may beperformed on an SCell. A base station 2202 may send (e.g., transmit) oneor more messages (e.g., one or more RRC messages) 2212 for configuringmultiple BWPs (e.g., multiple BWPs comprising a DL BWP 0, a DL BWP 1, aDL BWP 2, a DL BWP 3, an UL BWP 0, an UL BWP 1, an UL BWP 2, and an ULBWP 3 shown in tables 2206 and 2208, respectively). The multiple BWPsmay be BWPs of an SCell. The DL (and/or UL) BWP 0 may be a default BWP.The DL (and/or UL) BWP 1 may be a first (or initial) active BWP (e.g., afirst DL BWP or a first UL BWP). A wireless device 2204 may determinethe multiple BWPs configured for the wireless device 2204, for example,based on the one or more messages 2212. The base station 2202 may send,to the wireless device 2204, a MAC CE 2214 for activating the SCell(e.g., at a time n). The wireless device 2204 may activate the SCell(e.g., at a time n+k). The wireless device 2204 may start to monitor aPDCCH on (e.g., sent via) the DL BWP 1. The base station 2202 may sendDCI 2216 for a DL assignment (e.g., at a time m). The DCI 2216 may besent via the DL BWP 1 (e.g., a first DL BWP). The wireless device 2204may receive a packet via the DL BWP 1 or via another active DL BWP(e.g., at a time m+1), for example, based on the DL assignment. Thewireless device 2204 may start a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at the timem+1). The wireless device 2204 may start the BWP inactivity timer, forexample, after receiving scheduled downlink packets. The base station2202 may send DCI 2216 for an UL grant (e.g., at the time m). The DCI2216 may be sent via the DL BWP 1 (e.g., a first DL BWP or an initial DLBWP). The wireless device 2204 may send a packet via an UL BWP 1 (e.g.,via a first UL BWP or an initial UL BWP at a time m+1), for example,based on the UL grant. The wireless device 2204 may start a BWPinactivity timer (e.g., at the time m+1). The wireless device 2204 maystart the BWP inactivity timer, for example, after sending scheduleduplink packets.

The BWP inactivity timer may expire (e.g., at a time s). The BWPinactivity may expire, for example, if the wireless device 2204 does notperform reception or transmission for a period of time (e.g., a periodfrom the time m+1 to the time s). The wireless device 2204 may switchthe DL BWP 1 to the DL BWP 0 (e.g., a default BWP). The fallback to theDL BWP 0 may occur (e.g., at a time s+t), for example, after the BWPinactivity timer expires. The base station 2202 may send, to thewireless device 2204, a MAC CE 2218 for deactivating the SCell (e.g., ata time o). The wireless device 2204 may deactivate the SCell and/or stopthe BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at a time o+p). The wireless device 2204may deactivate the SCell and/or stop the BWP inactivity timer, forexample, after receiving and/or checking an indication of the MAC CE2218.

A MAC entity may use operations on an active BWP for an activatedserving cell configured with a BWP, such as one or more of: transmittingvia an UL-SCH; transmitting via a RACH; monitoring a PDCCH; transmittingvia a PUCCH; receiving via a DL-SCH; initializing and/or reinitializingsuspended configured uplink grants of configured grant Type 1 accordingto a stored configuration, if any and/or to start in a symbol based on aprocedure. On an inactive BWP for each activated serving cell configuredwith a BWP, a MAC entity: may refrain from transmitting via an UL-SCH,may refrain from transmitting via a RACH, may refrain from monitoring aPDCCH, may refrain from transmitting via a PUCCH, may refrain fromtransmitting an SRS, may refrain from receiving via a DL-SCH, may clearany configured downlink assignment and configured uplink grant ofconfigured grant Type 2, and/or may suspend any configured uplink grantof configured Type 1.

A random access procedure (e.g., based on an initiation of the randomaccess procedure) on an active DL BWP and the active UL BWP may beperformed, for example, if PRACH resources are configured for the activeUL BWP. The random access procedure may be performed, for example, by aMAC entity. A MAC entity may switch to an initial DL BWP and an initialUL BWP, for example, if PRACH resources are not configured for an activeUL BWP (e.g., based on initiation of a random access procedure). The MACentity may perform the random access procedure on the initial DL BWP andthe initial UL BWP, for example, based on the BWP switching.

A wireless device may perform BWP switching to a BWP indicated by aPDCCH, for example, if a MAC entity receives a PDCCH (e.g., a PDCCHorder) for a BWP switching of a serving cell, for example, if a randomaccess procedure associated with this serving cell is not ongoing.

A wireless device may determine whether to switch a BWP or ignore thePDCCH for the BWP switching, for example, if a MAC entity received aPDCCH for a BWP switching while a random access procedure is ongoing inthe MAC entity. The MAC entity may stop the ongoing Random Accessprocedure and initiate a second Random Access procedure on a newactivated BWP, for example, if the MAC entity decides to perform the BWPswitching. The MAC entity may continue with the ongoing Random Accessprocedure on the active BWP, for example if the MAC decides to ignorethe PDCCH for the BWP switching. A wireless device may perform the BWPswitching to a BWP indicated by the PDCCH, for example, if a MAC entityreceives a PDCCH for a BWP switching addressed to a C-RNTI for asuccessful completion of a Random Access procedure.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP for a variety of reasons. The MAC entity maystart or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associated with the active DLBWP, for example, if one or more of the following occur: aBWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated serving sell, if aDefault-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not a BWP indicatedby the Default-DL-BWP, if the Default-DL-BWP is not configured and theactive DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if one or more of thefollowing occur: if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI or CS-RNTI indicatingdownlink assignment or uplink grant is received on the active BWP,and/or if there is not an ongoing random access procedure associatedwith the activated serving cell.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP, for example, if one or more of the followingoccur: if a BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated servingcell, if a Default-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not aBWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or if the Default-DL-BWP is notconfigured and the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a MAC-PDU is transmitted in aconfigured uplink grant or received in a configured downlink assignment,and/or if there is not an ongoing random access procedure associatedwith the activated serving cell.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP, for example, if one or more of the followingoccur: if a BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated servingcell, if a Default-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not aBWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or if the Default-DL-BWP is notconfigured and the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI orCS-RNTI indicating downlink assignment or uplink grant is received onthe active BWP, if a MAC-PDU is transmitted in a configured uplink grantor received in a configured downlink assignment, and/or if an ongoingrandom access procedure associated with the activated Serving Cell issuccessfully completed in response to receiving the PDCCH addressed to aC-RNTI.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP based on switching the active BWP. For example,the MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP if a PDCCH for BWP switching is received and thewireless device switches an active DL BWP to the DL BWP, and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a default downlink BWP is configuredand the DL BWP is not the default downlink BWP, and/or if a defaultdownlink BWP is not configured and the DL BWP is not the initialdownlink BWP.

The MAC entity may stop the BWP-InactivityTimer associated with anactive DL BWP of the activated serving cell, for example, if one or moreof the following occur: if BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for anactivated serving cell, if the Default-DL-BWP is configured and theactive DL BWP is not the BWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or ifthe Default-DL-BWP is not configured and the active DL BWP is not theinitial BWP; and/or if a random access procedure is initiated. The MACentity may stop a second BWP-InactivityTimer associated with a secondactive DL BWP of an SpCell, for example, if the activated Serving Cellis an SCell (other than a PSCell).

The MAC entity may perform BWP switching to a BWP indicated by theDefault-DL-BWP, for example, if one or more of the following occur: if aBWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated serving cell, if theDefault-DL-BWP is configured and the active DL BWP is not the BWPindicated by the Default-DL-BWP, if the Default-DL-BWP is not configuredand the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP, if BWP-InactivityTimerassociated with the active DL BWP expires, and/or if the Default-DL-BWPis configured. The MAC entity may perform BWP switching to the initialDL BWP, for example, if the MAC entity may refrain from performing BWPswitching to a BWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP.

A wireless device may be configured for operation in BWPs of a servingcell. The wireless device may be configured by higher layers for theserving cell for a set of (e.g., four) bandwidth parts (BWPs) forreceptions by the wireless device (e.g., DL BWP set) in a DL bandwidthby a parameter (e.g., DL-BWP). The wireless device may be configuredwith a set of (e.g., four) BWPs for transmissions by the wireless device(e.g., UL BWP set) in an UL bandwidth by a parameter (e.g., UL-BWP) forthe serving cell. An initial active DL BWP may be determined, forexample, by: a location and number of contiguous PRBs; a subcarrierspacing; and/or a cyclic prefix (e.g., for the control resource set fora Type0-PDCCH common search space). A wireless device may be provided(e.g., by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., initial-UL-BWP) for aninitial active UL BWP for a random access procedure, for example, foroperation on a primary cell. The wireless device may be provided (e.g.,by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-DL-Pcell) for firstactive DL BWP for receptions, for example, if a wireless device has adedicated BWP configuration. The wireless device may be provided (e.g.,by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-UL-Pcell) for a firstactive UL BWP for transmissions on a primary cell, for example, if awireless device has a dedicated BWP configuration.

The wireless device may be configured with a variety of parameters for aDL BWP and/or for an UL BWP in a set of DL BWPs and/or UL BWPs,respectively, for a serving cell. The wireless device may be configuredwith one or more of: a subcarrier spacing (e.g., provided by higherlayer parameter DL-BWP-mu or UL-BWP-mu), a cyclic prefix (e.g., providedby higher layer parameter DL-BWP-CP or UL-BWP-CP), a PRB offset withrespect to the PRB (e.g., determined by higher layer parametersoffset-pointA-low-scs and ref-scs) and a number of contiguous PRBs(e.g., provided by higher layer parameter DL-BWP-BW or UL-BWP-BW), anindex in the set of DL BWPs or UL BWPs (e.g., by respective higher layerparameters DL-BWP-index or UL-BWP-index), a DCI format 1_0 or DCI format1_1 detection to a PDSCH reception timing values (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter DL-data-time-domain), a PDSCH reception to aHARQ-ACK transmission timing values (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter DL-data-DL-acknowledgement), and/or a DCI 0_0 or DCI 0_1detection to a PUSCH transmission timing values (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter UL-data-time-domain).

A DL BWP from a set of configured DL BWPs (e.g., with an index providedby higher layer parameter DL-BWP-index) may be paired with an UL BWPfrom a set of configured UL BWPs (e.g., with an index provided by higherlayer parameter UL-BWP-index). A DL BWP from a set of configured DL BWPsmay be paired with an UL BWP from a set of configured UL BWPs, forexample, if the DL BWP index and the UL BWP index are equal (e.g., forunpaired spectrum operation). A wireless device may not be expected toreceive a configuration where the center frequency for a DL BWP isdifferent from the center frequency for an UL BWP, for example, if theDL-BWP-index of the DL BWP is equal to the UL-BWP-index of the UL BWP(e.g., for unpaired spectrum operation).

A wireless device may be configured with control resource sets (e.g.,coresets) for every type of common search space and/or for wirelessdevice-specific search space, for example, for a DL BWP in a set of DLBWPs on a primary cell. The wireless device may not be expected to beconfigured without a common search space on the PCell, or on the PSCell,in the active DL BWP. The wireless device may be configured with controlresource sets for PUCCH transmissions, for example, for an UL BWP in aset of UL BWPs. A wireless device may receive a PDCCH message and/or aPDSCH message in a DL BWP, for example, according to a configuredsubcarrier spacing and/or a CP length for the DL BWP. A wireless devicemay transmit via a PUCCH and/or via a PUSCH in an UL BWP, for example,according to a configured subcarrier spacing and CP length for the ULBWP.

The BWP indicator field value may indicate an active DL BWP, from theconfigured DL BWP set, for DL receptions, for example, if a BWPindicator field is configured in DCI format 1_1. The BWP indicator fieldvalue may indicate the active UL BWP, from the configured UL BWP set,for UL transmissions. A wireless device may be provided (e.g., for theprimary cell) with a higher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP, orany other a default DL BWP among the configured DL BWPs), for example,if a BWP indicator field is configured in DCI format 0_1. The defaultBWP may be the initial active DL BWP, for example, if a wireless deviceis not provided a default DL BWP by higher layer parameterDefault-DL-BWP. A wireless device may be expected to detect a DCI format0_1 indicating active UL BWP change, or a DCI format 1_1 indicatingactive DL BWP change, for example, if a corresponding PDCCH is receivedwithin first 3 symbols of a slot.

A wireless device may be provided (e.g., for a primary cell) with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP, or any other a default DLBWP among the configured DL BWPs). The default DL BWP may be the initialactive DL BWP, for example, if a wireless device is not provided adefault DL BWP by the higher layer parameter Default-DL-BWP. A wirelessdevice may be provided with a higher layer parameter (e.g.,BWP-InactivityTimer) for a timer value for the primary cell. Thewireless device may increment the timer, if running, every interval of 1millisecond for frequency range 1, every 0.5 milliseconds for frequencyrange 2, or any other interval, for example, if the wireless device maynot detect a DCI format 1_1 for paired spectrum operation or, forexample, if the wireless device may not detect a DCI format 1_1 or DCIformat 0_1 for unpaired spectrum operation during the interval.

Wireless device procedures on the secondary cell may be same as on theprimary cell. Wireless device procedures may use the timer value for thesecondary cell and the default DL BWP for the secondary cell, forexample, if a wireless device is configured for a secondary cell with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP) indicating a default DLBWP among the configured DL BWPs and the wireless device is configuredwith a higher layer parameter (e.g., BWP-InactivityTimer) indicating atimer value. The wireless device may use the indicated DL BWP and theindicated UL BWP on the secondary cell as the respective first active DLBWP and first active UL BWP on the secondary cell or carrier, forexample, if a wireless device is configured by a higher layer parameter(e.g., Active-BWP-DL-SCell) for a first active DL BWP and by a higherlayer parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-UL-SCell) for a first active UL BWP ona secondary cell or carrier.

A wireless device may have difficulty in determining whether DCI isindicating a BWP switching, a BWP activation, or a BWP deactivation, forexample, if multiple active BWPs in a cell (e.g., PCell or SCell) aresupported. A DCI format may be used (e.g., any legacy DCI format, a DCIformat of NR Release 15, or any other DCI format). The DCI format maycomprise a BWP index indicating a new BWP. Misalignment between a basestation and the wireless device may occur regarding a state of a BWP. Abase station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI comprising: a first fieldindicating a BWP, and/or a second field indicating a BWP action. The BWPaction may comprise one or more of: switching to the BWP, activating theBWP, and/or deactivating the BWP. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit) a MAC CE comprising an n-bit bitmap (e.g., an 8-bit bitmapassociated with 4 bits for DL BWPs and/or 4 bits for UL BWPs, or anyother quantity of bits) indicating that one or more BWPs may beactivated/deactivated (e.g., activated or deactivated). A base stationmay designate a first BWP of a cell as a primary active BWP. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit), via the primary active BWP, DCIactivating/deactivating (e.g., activating or deactivating) a secondaryBWP of the cell.

Multiple active BWPs may increase spectral efficiency, communicationspeed, interference mitigation, provide service-friendly BWP management,and/or other performance measures, for example, relative to aconfiguration supporting a single active BWP at a time (e.g., a singleDL BWP and a single UL BWP at a time). Multiple active BWPs may supporta plurality of active DL BWPs and/or a plurality of active UL BWPs.Configuring multiple active BWPS may require more complex BWP controlprotocols and technical designs, for example, relative to a singleactive BWP configuration. Some RRC signaling and/or DCI formats (e.g.,legacy signaling and/or format, and/or other signaling and/or formats)may cause one or more problems, such as the misalignment between a basestation and a wireless device regarding states of multiple BWPs.

One or more RRC signaling messages and/or one or more DCI formats may beenhanced. An RRC message may configure multiple active BWPs. An RRCmessage may configure one or more primary BWPs and one or more secondaryBWPs. An RRC message may configure whether the one or more primary BWPsare switchable by DCI and/or a MAC CE. An RRC message may configuredifferent BWPs for sending DCI for indicating a BWP change, for example,based on whether the one or more primary BWPs are switchable by DCIand/or a MAC CE. DCI may have a plurality of fields associated with aBWP control. A first field of DCI may indicate a BWP ID. A second fieldof the DCI may indicate an action associated with a BWP indicated by theBWP ID. The second field may have different sizes, for example,depending on different configurations and/or requirements. The size ofthe second field may be (e.g., semi-statically) changed (e.g., based onone or more RRC messages). The size of the second field may bedetermined, for example, based on whether a designated BWP is indicatedas a primary active BWP and/or whether the designated BWP is allowed tobe switched dynamically.

One or more MAC CEs may be configured for a plurality of BWP control,for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported. A MAC CE maycomprise a bitmap associated with a plurality of DL BWPs and/or aplurality of UL BWPs. The MAC CE may indicate activation/deactivation ofeach of multiple BWPs.

Some communications (e.g., communications based on one or more DCIs) mayenable dynamic BWP state changes without (or with reduced) processingdelays and may avoid or reduce misalignments between a base station anda wireless device. These communications may be applicable, for example,if services, channel quality, and/or traffic loading on BWPs changefrequently. Some other communications (e.g., communications based on oneor more MAC CEs) may provide more robust BWP state controls and/or mayreduce blind decoding complexity and/or power consumption of wirelessdevices. The latter communications may change states of a plurality ofBWPs at the same time and may reduce signaling overhead. The lattercommunications may be applicable, for example, if services, channelquality, and/or traffic loading on BWPs change infrequently. Differentcommunications may be used together or may be separately configuredbetween a base station and a wireless device, for example, depending onvarying requirements and signaling environments.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to, or receive from, a wirelessdevice one or more data packets. The one or more data packets may besent, or received, via one or more radio resources. The one or more datepackets may be one or more URLLC (Ultra-Reliable Low LatencyCommunication) data packets with a small packet size (e.g., <100 bytes),which may require ultra-reliable (e.g., BLER less than10^({circumflex over ( )}(−5))) and low latency delivery (e.g., lessthan 1 millisecond) between the base station and the wireless device.The one or more data packets may be one or more eMBB (enhanced MobileBroadband) data packets with a large packet size (e.g., >1000 bytes),which may require a large bandwidth (e.g., 400 MHz˜1 GHz) and/or a largeamount of radio resources for transmission. The one or more date packetsmay be one or more machine-type communication (e.g., MTC) data packetswith a small packet size, which require a wide communication coverage(e.g., 10 KM˜100 KM) or a transmission to a wireless device located in abasement. Other types of the one or more data packets may comprisevehicle to everything (V2X) packet(s) which may be transmitted betweenvehicles, or between vehicle and pedestrian, or between vehicle androadside node, packet of industrial internet of things (IIOT), and thelike. It may be beneficial to transmit a first type of service (eMBB,URLLC, MTC, V2X and/or IIOT) on a first active BWP of a cell andtransmit a second type of service (eMBB, URLLC, V2X and/or IIOT) on asecond active BWP of the cell, for example, if multiple services arelaunched in a cell. BWP and/or CA operation configurations may supportat most one active BWP in a cell. The BWP and/or CA operationconfigurations may be less efficient and/or result in significanttransmission latency, for example, if a base station attempts to send(e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, data packets for multipleservices on multiple active BWPs. Activation/deactivation of an SCellbased on a MAC CE (e.g., for adding an additional active BWP) may take along time (e.g., several tens of milliseconds) and a significant delaymay occur, for example, if the base station attempts to send the datapackets by frequently activating and/or deactivating the multiple BWPs.Data transmission associated with some types of service on an additionalactive BWP of the SCell may not be tolerant of a delay caused by theactivation/deactivation. The transmission latency may be improved, forexample, by supporting multiple active BWPs in a cell.

A base station and/or a wireless device may be configured with multipleBWPs for a cell. A base station and a wireless device may communicatewith each other via multiple active BWPs of the multiple BWPs inparallel (e.g., simultaneously or overlapped in time) to accommodatemultiple services (e.g., eMBB, URLLC, VTX, IIOT, and/or MTC). A basestation may send (e.g., transmit), via a first active BWP, an eMBB datapacket to a wireless device. The base station may send (e.g., transmit),via a second active BWP, a URLLC data packet to the wireless device. Thebase station may send (e.g., transmit), via a third active BWP, an MTCdata packet to the wireless device. Transmitting multiple data packetsfor different services via different active BWPs in parallel (e.g.,simultaneously or overlapped in time) may reduce latency. Transmittingfirst data (e.g., eMBB data) and second data (e.g., URLLC data) via asingle active BWP may cause interruption of one transmission (e.g., theeMBB data transmission) by another transmission (e.g., the URLLC datatransmission). Transmitting multiple data packets for different servicesvia different active BWPs in parallel (e.g., simultaneously oroverlapped in time) may avoid the interruption. Physical and MAC layerprocedures configured for the BWP operation configuration that does notsupport multiple active BWPs in a cell may not be suitable for the BWPoperation configuration that supports multiple active BWPs in a cell(e.g., such an implementation may result in an inefficient BWPmanagement process). Multiple active BWPs may not be efficientlysupported in some systems (e.g., legacy systems and/or NR physical layerand MAC layer operation procedures). Physical layer and MAC layerprocedures may be enhanced, and evolved signaling for an efficient BWPoperation procedure may be configured to support multiple active BWPsoperation in a cell.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore messages comprising configuration parameters of a cell. The one ormore messages may comprise one or more RRC messages (e.g., an RRCconnection reconfiguration message, an RRC connection reestablishmentmessage, and/or an RRC connection setup message). The cell may be aPCell (or a PSCell) or an SCell, for example, if a carrier aggregationor dual connectivity is configured. The cell may comprise a plurality ofdownlink BWPs. Each of the plurality of downlink BWPs may be associatedwith a BWP ID (e.g., a BWP-specific ID) and/or one or more parameters.The cell may comprise a plurality of uplink BWPs. Each of the pluralityof uplink BWPs may be associated with a BWP ID (e.g., a BWP-specific ID)and/or one or more second parameters.

Each of the plurality of the downlink BWPs may be in one of an activestate and an inactive state. A wireless device may perform operationsvia an active BWP (e.g., a DL BWP or an UL BWP). The operations maycomprise transmitting an UL-SCH, transmitting a RACH, monitoring aPDCCH, transmitting a PUCCH, receiving a DL-SCH, and/or initializing (orreinitializing) any suspended configured uplink grants of configuredgrant Type 1 according to a stored configuration. For an inactive BWP(e.g., a DL BWP or an UL BWP), the wireless device may not transmit anUL-SCH, may not transmit a RACH, may not monitor a PDCCH, may nottransmit a PUCCH, may not transmit an SRS, may not receive a DL-SCH, mayclear any configured downlink assignment and configured uplink grant ofconfigured grant Type 2, and/or may suspend any configured uplink grantof configured Type 1.

The one or more parameters (and/or the one or more second parameters)may comprise at least one of: a control resource set identified by acontrol resource set index; a subcarrier spacing; a cyclic prefix; aDM-RS scrambling sequence initialization value; a number of consecutivesymbols; a set of resource blocks in frequency domain; a CCE-to-REGmapping; an REG bundle size; a cyclic shift for the REG bundle; anantenna port quasi-co-location; and/or an indication for a presence orabsence of a TCI field for DCI format 1_0 or 1_1 transmitted on thecontrol resource set. The one or more parameters may comprisecell-specific parameters. The one or more second parameters may compriseBWP-specific parameters. The configuration parameters may furtherindicate at least one of: an initial active DL BWP, of the plurality ofDL BWPs, identified by a first BWP ID and/or a default DL BWP, of theplurality of DL BWPs, identified by a second BWP ID. The second BWP IDmay be same as, or different from, the first BWP ID. The default DL BWPmay be in inactive state, for example, if the second BWP ID is differentfrom the first BWP ID of the initial active DL BWP.

The initial active DL BWP may be associated with one or more controlresource set for one or more common search space (e.g., type0-PDCCHcommon search space). A wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH sentvia the initial active DL BWP of a PCell (or a PSCell) to detect DCI inthe first PDCCH, for example, if the wireless device switches from RRCidle state to RRC connected state.

A base station may activate an additional BWP dynamically (e.g., viaDCI, a MAC CE, etc.), for example, if at least one of multiple types ofservices are triggered for transmission via the additional BWP. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit) a first command to the wireless deviceto activate a second DL BWP, of the plurality of DL BWPs, indicated(e.g., identified) by a third BWP ID. The first command may be a MAC CEor DCI. The third BWP ID may be different from the first BWP ID and/ordifferent from the second BWP ID. The wireless device may transition(e.g., switch) the second DL BWP from inactive state to active stateand/or may maintain the initial active BWP in active state, for example,after or in response to the activating. The wireless device may monitora first PDCCH sent via the initial active DL BWP. The wireless devicemay monitor a second PDCCH sent via the second DL BWP in parallel (e.g.,simultaneously or overlapped in time), for example, after or in responseto the activating. Activating the second DL BWP may not change the stateof the initial active DL BWP.

FIG. 23A shows an example of configuring multiple active BWPs. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit) the first command (e.g., at a time T1)to the wireless device to activate another BWP (e.g., an A-BWP2), forexample, if there is at least one active DL BWP (e.g., an A-BWP1) of aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. The A-BWP2 may be different from theA-BWP1. The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the A-BWP2from inactive state to active state and/or maintain the A-BWP1 in activestate (e.g., at a time T2 after the time T1). Activating the A-BWP2 maynot change the state of the A-BWP1.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore RRC messages comprising configuration parameters indicating a firstactive DL BWP and at least one second active DL BWP of a PCell (or aPSCell), for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported by thewireless device. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH sent viathe first active DL BWP of a PCell (or a PSCell) and monitor at leastone second PDCCH sent via the at least one second active DL BWP of thePCell (or the PSCell). The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCHand the at least one second PDCCH to detect one or more DCIs (e.g., whenthe wireless device is in RRC connected mode or the wireless devicesswitches from RRC idle state to RRC connected state). Configuringmultiple active BWPs by the one or more RRC messages may reducesignaling overhead for BWP activation.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore RRC messages comprising configuration parameters indicating a firstactive DL BWP of an SCell and at least one second active DL BWP of theSCell, for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported by thewireless device. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH sent viathe first active DL BWP and at least one second PDCCH sent via the atleast one second active DL BWP of the SCell. The wireless device maymonitor the first PDCCH and the at least one second PDCCH to detect oneor more DCIs (e.g., after or in response to the SCell being activated bya MAC CE or DCI). Configuring multiple active BWPs by the one or moreRRC messages may reduce signaling overhead for BWP activation.

FIG. 23B shows an example of a BWP switching if multiple active BWPs aresupported. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a second command toa wireless device to switch from an A-BWP1 to an A-BWP3 (at a time T2),for example, if there are at least two active DL BWPs (e.g., the A-BWP1and an A-BWP2) of a plurality of active BWPs in a cell (at a time T1before the time T2). The A-BWP1 may be the initial active DL BWPconfigured by the one or more messages. The A-BWP2 may be a DL BWPactivated by the first command. The second command may be a MAC CE orDCI. The A-BWP3 may be different from the A-BWP1 and from the A-BWP2.The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the A-BWP1 from activestate to inactive state, transition (e.g., switch) the A-BWP3 frominactive state to active state, and/or maintain the A-BWP2 in activestate, for example, after or in response to the switching. The wirelessdevice may monitor a first PDCCH sent via the A-BWP3 and/or monitor asecond PDCCH sent via the A-BWP2 in parallel (e.g., simultaneously oroverlapped in time), for example, after or in response to the switching.Switching to the A-BWP3 from A-BWP1 may comprise deactivating the A-BWP1and activating the A-BWP3.

FIG. 23C shows an example of BWP deactivation if multiple active BWPsare supported. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a third commandto a wireless device to deactivate an A-BWP2, for example, if there areat least two active DL BWPs (e.g., an A-BWP1 and the A-BWP2) of aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. The third command may be a MAC CE orDCI. The base station and/or the wireless device may deactivate theA-BWP2, for example, after or in response to an expiration of a BWPinactivity timer (e.g., associated with the A-BWP2 or associated withthe cell). The deactivating may comprise transiting (e.g., switching)the A-BWP2 from active state to inactive state and/or maintaining theA-BWP1 in active state (e.g., at a time T2). The wireless device maymonitor a first PDCCH sent via the A-BWP1 and/or stop monitoring asecond PDCCH associated with the A-BWP2, for example, after or inresponse to the deactivating. The deactivating the A-BWP2 may not changethe state of the A-BWP1 (e.g., the active state of the A-BWP1).

A base station and/or a wireless device may communicate via more thantwo active DL BWPs in a cell. The base station and/or the wirelessdevice may perform BWP activation, BWP deactivation, and BWP switching,for example, to flexibly provide different services. A base stationand/or a wireless device may maintain a first active DL BWP for a firsttransmission of a first service. The base station may activate a secondDL BWP to be a second active DL BWP, for example, if a second service istriggered. The wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHs and/orreceive data packets on both the first active DL BWP and the secondactive DL BWP, for example, after or in response to the activating. Thebase station and/or the wireless device may activate a third DL BWP tobe a third active DL BWP, for example, if a third service is triggered.The wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHs and/or receive datapackets on the first active DL BWP, the second active DL BWP, and thethird active DL BWP, for example, after or in response to theactivating.

A base station may cross-BWP schedule a second active DL BWP based on afirst active DL BWP, for example, which may reduce blind decodingcomplexity. Cross-BWP scheduling may comprise scheduling, by a basestation, a transmission (e.g., downlink or uplink transmissions) on ashared channel (e.g., downlink or uplink shared channels) of a secondBWP via control channels of a first BWP. The first active DL BWP may beconfigured with a first number of control resource sets and/or a secondnumber of search spaces. The second active DL BWP may be configured witha third number of control resource sets, and/or a fourth number ofsearch spaces. The first number may be greater than the third number.The second number may be greater than the fourth number. The secondactive DL BWP may be configured with no PDCCH resource.

FIG. 24A shows an example of a cross-BWP scheduling. A base station maysend (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a first PDCCH 2401A via afirst active DL BWP (e.g., a BWP 1) to schedule a first PDSCH 2411A ofthe BWP 1. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) a second PDCCH2402A via the BWP 1 to schedule a second PDSCH 2412A of a second activeBWP (e.g., a BWP 2), for example, if the BWP 2 is configured to becross-BWP scheduled by the BWP 1. The base station may send (e.g.,transmit) a third PDCCH 2403A via the BWP 1 to schedule a third PDSCH2413A of a third active BWP (e.g., a BWP 3), for example, if the BWP 3is configured to be cross-BWP scheduled by the BWP 1. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) a fourth PDCCH 2404A via the BWP 3 to schedulea fourth PDSCH 2414A of the BWP 3, for example, if BWP 3 is configuredto be self-scheduled. A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHssent via the BWP 1 for at least one second BWP, for example, if thecross-BWP scheduling is supported and the at least one second BWP isconfigured to be cross-BWP scheduled by the BWP 1. The first PDCCH2401A, the second PDCCH 2402A, and the third PDCCH 2403A may be threedistinct PDCCHs on a same search space. Each of the three distinctPDCCHs may be sent via different locations in the same search space.

FIG. 24B shows an example of a self-BWP scheduling. A PDSCH of an activeBWP may be self-scheduled by a PDCCH of the active BWP. A base stationmay schedule a first PDSCH resource 2411B on a first active BWP (e.g., aBWP 1) by a first PDCCH 2401B on the first active BWP. The base stationmay schedule a second PDSCH resource 2412B on a second active BWP (e.g.,a BWP 2) by a second PDCCH 2402B on the second active BWP. The basestation may schedule a third PDSCH resource 2413B on a third active BWP(e.g., a BWP 3) by a third PDCCH 2403B on the third active BWP.

A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHs in one or more commonsearch spaces on the multiple active DL BWPs, for example, with multipleactive DL BWPs in a cell (e.g., as shown in FIG. 23A, FIG. 23B and FIG.23C). Each of the multiple active DL BWPs may be associated with one ofthe one or more common search spaces. Configuring a common search spacefor each of multiple active DL BWPs may not be efficient for a PDCCHresource utilization in the cell. Configuring a common search space foreach of the multiple active DL BWPs may require a wireless device tomonitor multiple common search spaces for the multiple active DL BWPs,which may consume battery power in an inefficient manner. PDCCH resourceutilization efficiency and battery power efficiency may be improved byone or more configurations described herein. The one or moreconfigurations may comprise designating a first active DL BWP, ofmultiple active DL BWPs, as a primary active DL BWP (PBWP). The primaryactive DL BWP may be the initial active DL BWP configured in the one ormore messages. The primary active DL BWP may be associated with one ormore common search spaces, and/or one or more wireless device-specificsearch spaces (e.g., UE-specific search spaces). The primary active BWPmay be a BWP via which the wireless device may perform an initialconnection establishment procedure or may initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure. The primary active DL BWP may be associatedwith one or more common search spaces for one or more DCI formats withCRC scrambled by one of SI-RNTI, RA-RNTI, TC-RNTI, P-RNTI, INT-RNTI,SFI-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-SRS-RNTI, CS-RNTI,SP-CSI-RNTI, and/or C-RNTI. The one or more common search spaces maycomprise at least one of: a type0-PDCCH common search space; atype0A-PDCCH common search space; a type1-PDCCH common search space; atype2-PDCCH common search space; and/or a type3-PDCCH common searchspace. The one or more DCI formats may comprise at least one of: a DCIformat 0_0; a DCI format 0_1; a DCI format 1_0; a DCI format 1_1; a DCIformat 2_0; a DCI format 2_1; a DCI format 2_2; and/or a DCI format 2_3.

The determination of the PBWP may be indicated by an RRC message, afirst MAC CE, and/or first DCI. At least one second active DL BWP of themultiple active DL BWPs may be designated as at least one secondaryactive DL BWP (SBWP). The determination of the at least one SBWP may beindicated by a second MAC CE and/or second DCI. A secondary active DLBWP may be associated with one or more wireless device-specific searchspaces. A wireless device may monitor one or more common search spacesand one or more first wireless device-specific search spaces on a PBWPof the cell and/or one or more second wireless device-specific searchspaces on an SBWP of the cell, for example, if the PBWP and the SBWP aredesignated in the cell.

FIG. 25A shows an example of a PBWP switching. A base station maydesignate, from the multiple active DL BWPs, a first active DL BWP as aPBWP (e.g., a PBWP1), and a second active DL BWP as an SBWP (e.g., anSBWP1), for example, if multiple DL BWPs are in active states in a cell.A wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on the PBWP1 and a secondPDCCH on the SBWP1 (e.g., at a time T1). A base station may send (e.g.,transmit), to a wireless device, a first command to instruct a switchfrom the PBWP1 to a third BWP as a new primary BWP (e.g., a PBWP2). Thewireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the PBWP1 from activestate to inactive state and transition (e.g., switch) the third BWP(e.g., the PBWP2) from inactive state to active state, for example,after or in response to switching from the PBWP1 to the PBWP2. Theactivated third BWP may be a primary active BWP, for example, after orin response to the switching. The wireless device may monitor a firstPDCCH on common search spaces and first wireless device-specific searchspaces on the PBWP2 and/or may monitor a second PDCCH on second wirelessdevice-specific search spaces on the SBWP1, for example, after or inresponse to the switching from the PBWP1 to the PBWP2.

FIG. 25B shows an example of SBWP activation. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a second command to a wireless device to activate asecond DL BWP (e.g., an SBWP1) as a secondary BWP, for example, if aprimary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) of a plurality of active BWPs aredesignated in a cell. The second DL BWP may be different from the PBWP1and/or the plurality of active BWPs. The wireless device may transition(e.g., switch) the second DL BWP from inactive state to active state andmaintain the PBWP1 in active state, for example, after or in response tothe activating. The second DL BWP may be designated as an SBWP (e.g., anSBWP1), for example, after or in response to the activation. Thewireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on common search spaces andfirst wireless device-specific search spaces on the PBWP1 and maymonitor a second PDCCH on second wireless device-specific search spaceson the SBWP1, for example, after or in response to the activation.

FIG. 25C shows an example of SBWP switching. A base station may assign,to a wireless device and/or from the multiple active DL BWPs, a firstactive DL BWP as a PBWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and a second active DL BWP as anSBWP (e.g., an SBWP1), for example, if a primary active BWP (e.g., thePBWP1) of a plurality of active BWPs is designated in a cell. Thewireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on a PBWP1 and/or a secondPDCCH on an SBWP1. The base station may send (e.g., transmit), to thewireless device, a third command to switch from the SBWP1 to a third BWP(e.g., an SBWP2) as a new secondary BWP. The wireless device maytransition (e.g., switch) the SBWP1 from active state to inactive stateand/or transition (e.g., switch) the third BWP from inactive state toactive state, for example, after or in response to switching from theSBWP1 to the SBWP2. The activated third BWP may be a secondary activeBWP, for example, after or in response to the switching. The wirelessdevice may monitor the first PDCCH on common search spaces and/or firstwireless device-specific search spaces on the PBWP1 and/or a third PDCCHon second wireless device-specific search spaces on the SBWP2, forexample, after or in response to the switching from the SBWP1 to theSBWP2.

FIG. 25D shows an example of SBWP deactivation from a configuration inwhich multiple active DL BWPs are supported. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a fourth command to a wireless device to deactivate anSBWP1, for example, if a primary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and asecondary active BWP (e.g., the SBWP1) of a plurality of active DL BWPsare designated in a cell. The fourth command may be a MAC CE or DCI. Thebase station and/or the wireless device may deactivate the SBWP1, forexample, after or in response to an expiration of a BWP inactivitytimer. The BWP inactivity timer may be associated with the SBWP1. Thewireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the SBWP1 from activestate to inactive state and/or maintain the PBWP1 in active state, forexample, after or in response to the deactivating. The wireless devicemay monitor a first PDCCH on (e.g., sent via) the PBWP1 and/or stopmonitoring a second PDCCH on (e.g., associated with) the SBWP1, forexample, after or in response to the deactivating. Deactivating theSBWP1 may not change the state of the PBWP1.

A base station and/or a wireless device may not allow a PBWP switchingto a second active BWP by a MAC CE or by DCI, for example, in aconfiguration in which multiple active DL BWPs comprise a PBWP and atleast one SBWP in a cell. The base station and/or the wireless devicemay trigger an SBWP deactivation, an SBWP activation, and/or an SBWPswitching. Configuring the PBWP to be unswitchable may simplifysignaling designs and/or reduce implementation complexity of thewireless device. The PBWP may be switched to the second PBWP, forexample, only by an RRC message but not by a MAC CE or DCI. The RRCmessage triggering a PBWP switching may enable a base station tostatically (or semi-statically) switch the PBWP. FIG. 26A, FIG. 26B andFIG. 26C show examples of configurations in which a PBWP is configuredto be unswitchable (e.g., always active), such as by DCI. Configuring aPBWP to be unswitchable (e.g., at least by DCI) may simplifyimplementation of procedures for a base station and a wireless device,reduce signaling overhead, and/or reduce battery consumption of thewireless device. A wireless device may switch the PBWP to a new PBWP,for example, after or in response to receiving an RRC message indicatingPBWP switching.

FIG. 26A shows an example of SBWP activation. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a first command to a wireless device to activate asecond DL BWP as a secondary BWP (e.g., an SBWP1), for example, if aprimary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) of a plurality of active DL BWPs isdesignated in a cell. The second DL BWP may be different from the PBWP1and/or the plurality of active BWPs. The wireless device may transition(e.g., switch) the second DL BWP from inactive state to active state andmay maintain the PBWP1 in active state, for example, after or inresponse to the activating. The second DL BWP may be designated as anSBWP (e.g., an SBWP1), for example, after or in response to theactivation. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on commonsearch spaces and/or first wireless device-specific search spaces onPBWP1 and/or a second PDCCH on second wireless device-specific searchspaces on the SBWP1, for example, after or in response to theactivation.

FIG. 26B shows an example of SBWP deactivation. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a second command to a wireless device to deactivate theSBWP1, for example, if a primary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and asecondary active BWP (e.g., the SBWP1) of a plurality of active DL BWPsare designated in a cell. The second command may be a MAC CE or DCI. Thebase station and/or the wireless device may deactivate the SBWP1, forexample, after or in response to an expiration of a BWP inactivitytimer. The BWP inactivity timer may be associated with the SBWP1. Thewireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the SBWP1 from activestate to inactive state and/or may maintain the PBWP1 in active state,for example, after or in response to the deactivating. The wirelessdevice may monitor a first PDCCH on (e.g., sent via) the PBWP1 and/ormay stop monitoring a second PDCCH on (e.g., associated with) the SBWP1,for example, after or in response to the deactivating.

FIG. 26C shows an example of SBWP switching. A base station may assign,to a wireless device and/or from multiple DL active BWPs, a first activeDL BWP as a PBWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and a second active DL BWP as an SBWP(e.g., an SBWP1), for example, if the multiple DL active BWPs areconfigured in a cell. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on(e.g., sent via) the PBWP1 and a second PDCCH on (e.g., sent via) theSBWP1. A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to the wireless device,a third command to switch from the SBWP1 to a third BWP as a secondaryBWP (e.g., the SBWP2). The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch)the SBWP1 from active state to inactive state and/or transition (e.g.,switch) the third BWP from inactive state to active state, for example,after or in response to switching from the SBWP1 to the SBWP2. Theactivated third BWP may be the secondary active BWP (e.g., the SBWP2).The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCH on common search spacesand/or first wireless device-specific search spaces on the PBWP1 and/ora third PDCCH on second wireless device-specific search spaces on theSBWP2, for example, after or in response to the switching from the SBWP1to the SBWP2.

Some wireless devices (e.g., a first wireless device) may support atmost one active BWP in a cell. Other wireless devices (e.g., a secondwireless device) may support more than one active BWP in a cell. A basestation and/or the first wireless device may trigger a BWP switching toa second BWP as an active BWP.

Some wireless device (e.g., a second wireless device) may support aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. For at least some of these wirelessdevices (e.g., a second wireless device), no specific designation of aPBWP or an SBWP of the plurality of active BWPs may be performed (e.g.,as shown in FIGS. 23A, 23B, and 23C). Each of the plurality of activeBWPs may be associated with one or more common search spaces. The secondwireless device may communicate with the base station via the pluralityof active BWPs in the cell. The base station and/or the second wirelessdevice may trigger activating/deactivating a BWP and/or switching from afirst BWP to a second BWP as a second active BWP.

Some wireless devices (e.g., a third wireless device) may support aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. For some wireless devices (e.g., thethird wireless device), a PBWP and at least one SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs may be designated, and/or the PBWP may be maintained inactive state, for example, at least until the third wireless devicereceives an indication of (e.g., an RRC message indicating) a PBWPswitching. The PBWP may not be switched to a new active BWP dynamically(e.g., by DCI transmitted on a PDCCH). The third wireless device maycommunicate with the base station via the plurality of active BWPs inthe cell. The base station and/or the third wireless device may triggeractivating/deactivating an SBWP and/or switching from a first SBWP to asecond BWP as a second SBWP.

Some wireless devices (e.g., a fourth wireless device) may support aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. For the some wireless devices (e.g.,the fourth wireless device), a PBWP and at least one SBWP of theplurality of active BWPs may be designated, and/or the PBWP may beswitched to a new BWP as a new PBWP dynamically (e.g., by DCItransmitted on a PDCCH). The fourth wireless device may communicate withthe base station via the plurality of active BWPs in the cell. The basestation and/or the wireless device may trigger activating/deactivatingan SBWP, switching from a first PBWP to a second BWP as a second PBWP,and/or switching from a first SBWP to a third BWP as a second SBWP.

Different wireless devices may support different BWP operation modes. Awireless device may send (e.g., transmit) various information to a basestation indicating the wireless device's capability of one or more ofmultiple BWP operation modes in a cell. The multiple BWP operation modesin a cell may comprise at least one of: a first mode in which thewireless may support a single active BWP in the cell; a second mode inwhich the wireless device may support multiple active BWPs, without aPBWP designation, in the cell; a third mode in which the wireless devicemay support multiple active BWPs with a PBWP and at least one SBWPdesignated and the PBWP switchable by an RRC message; a fourth mode inwhich the wireless device may support multiple active BWPs with a PBWPand at least one SBWP designated and the PBWP switchable by DCI; a fifthmode in which the wireless device may support multiple active BWPs withmultiple PBWPs and multiple SBWPs designated and the PBWP switchable byan RRC or DCI; and/or any other modes. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit), to a wireless device, one or more messages indicating one ormore of the multiple BWP operation modes.

A base station and/or a wireless device may communicate via the multipleactive BWPs with a default BWP operation mode, for example, if multipleactive BWPs are supported. The default BWP operation mode may be one ofthe multiple BWP operation modes. A wireless device capable ofsupporting a first specification (e.g., a legacy device, a deviceconfigured to 3GPP Release 15, or a device configured for any otherspecification) may perform a BWP operation with the first mode (e.g.,supporting a single active BWP in a cell) of the multiple BWP operationmodes. A wireless device capable of supporting a second specification(e.g., a legacy device, a device configured to 3GPP Release 16, or adevice configured for any other specification) may perform a BWPoperation with the default BWP mode of the multiple BWP operation modes.To support multiple active BWPs in a cell, a default BWP mode may bepreconfigured (e.g., predefined) as one of the second mode, the thirdmode, the fourth mode, the fifth mode, and/or any other mode, ofmultiple BWP operation modes.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore messages comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of DLBWPs in a cell. Multiple DL BWPs of a plurality of DL BWPs may beactivated as active DL BWPs. A wireless device and/or a base station maycommunicate via the active DL BWPs comprising a PBWP and an SBWP. ThePBWP may switch to a first DL BWP as a new PBWP. The SBWP may switch toa second DL BWP as a new SBWP. The SBWP may be deactivated. A third BWPmay be activated as a second SBWP. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit) one or more DCIs indicating a PBWP switching, an SBWPactivation, an SBWP deactivation, an SBWP switching, and/or a PDSCHscheduling on a PBWP or on an SBWP. The indication by the one or moreDCIs may be, for example, based on at least one of: one or more valuesof one or more fields of the one or more DCI; and/or whether the one ormore DCI is transmitted via a PBWP or an SBWP. The one or more DCIs maybe sent (e.g., transmitted) with DCI format 1_0 or 1_1 indicating aPDSCH scheduling. The one or more fields may comprise at least one of: acarrier indicator; an identifier for a DCI format; a BWP indicator; afirst field indicating a frequency domain resource assignment; a secondfield indicating a time domain resource assignment; a PUCCH resourceindicator; a TPC command for a scheduled PUCCH; and/or aPDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator. Reusing an existing DCI format(e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 1_1) for a BWP operation supporting multipleactive BWPs may reduce blind decoding complexity at a wireless device.

A wireless device may switch the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWPindicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based onat least one of: the one or more DCI being transmitted via the PBWP; theBWP indicator indicating the first BWP different from the PBWP and theSBWP (e.g., if configured); and/or a value of the first field and/or thesecond field being different from a first value (e.g., all zeros) and/ora second value (e.g., all ones). The first value and/or the second valuemay be predefined (e.g., fixed). The wireless device may switch the SBWPto a second BWP as a new SBWP indicated (e.g., identified) by the BWPindicator, for example, based on at least one of: the one or more DCIsbeing transmitted via the SBWP; the BWP indicator indicating the secondBWP different from the PBWP and from the SBWP; and/or a value of thefirst field and/or the second field being different from the first value(e.g., all zeros) and/or the second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may activate a third BWP as a new SBWP indicated(e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the third BWP different from thePBWP and from the SBWP; and/or the value of the first field and/or thesecond field being the first value (e.g., all zeros). The wirelessdevice may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at least one of:the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; the BWP indicatorindicating the SBWP; and/or the value of the first field or the secondfield being the second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP (e.g.,without a PBWP switching), for example, based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating the PBWP; and/or the value of the first fieldor the second field being different from the first value (e.g., allzeros) and/or the second value (e.g., all ones). The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via an SBWP (e.g., without an SBWPswitching/activation/deactivation), for example, based on at least oneof: the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP; and/or the value of the firstfield or the second field being different from the first value (e.g.,all zeros) and/or the second value (e.g., all ones). The wireless devicemay receive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH on (e.g.,sent via) the PBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving theDL assignment on the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or moreDL data packets from a second PDSCH on (e.g., sent via) the SBWP, forexample, after or in response to receiving the DL assignment via theSBWP.

The base station and the wireless device may dynamically switch a PBWPto a new PBWP, activate an SBWP, deactivate an SBWP, or switch an SBWPto a new SBWP, for example, based on one or more fields of one or moreDCIs. Blind decoding complexity and implementation cost of the wirelessdevice may be reduced, and multiple active BWPs may be flexiblysupported. A base station and/or a wireless device may support, forexample, a PBWP and at most one SBWP of a plurality of BWPs. Supportingthe PBWP and the at most one SBWP, compared with one single active BWPin a cell, may improve spectrum efficiency and maintain an acceptablelevel of implementation complexity of the base station and/or thewireless device.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPBWP switching, an SBWP activation, and/or a PDSCH scheduling on a PBWPor on an SBWP, for example, based on at least one of: one or more valuesof one or more fields of the one or more DCIs; and/or whether the one ormore DCIs are transmitted via a PBWP or an SBWP. The one or more DCIsmay be sent, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP of a pluralityof DL BWPs are supported. Activation of an SBWP may comprisedeactivating a first SBWP and activating a first inactive BWP as an SBWP(e.g., at a time). Activation of an SBWP may comprise activating a firstinactive BWP as an SBWP (e.g., if there is no SBWP before theactivating).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPBWP switching, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP of aplurality of BWPs are supported. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs indicating the PBWP switching based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating a first BWP different from the PBWP and fromthe SBWP; the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; and/orone or more value of the first field and/or the second field beingdifferent from a first value (e.g., all zeros) and/or a second value(e.g., all ones). The first value and/or the second value may bepredefined (e.g., fixed).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating anSBWP activation, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP of aplurality of BWPs are supported. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs indicating the SBWP activation based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating a BWP different from the PBWP (e.g., if thereis no SBWP in the cell); the BWP indicator indicating the BWP differentfrom the SBWP; the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; theone or more DCIs being transmitted via the SBWP; one or more value ofthe first field and/or the second field being the first value (e.g., allzeros); and/or the value of the first field or the second field beingthe second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) aPBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching), for example, based on the BWPindicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device may receive a DLassignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP (e.g., without SBWPswitching/activation), for example, based on the BWP indicatorindicating the SBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DL datapackets from a first PDSCH on the PBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment on the PBWP. The wireless devicemay receive one or more DL data packets from a second PDSCH on the SBWP,for example, after or in response to receiving the DL assignment on theSBWP. Blind decoding complexity and implementation cost of the wirelessdevice may be reduced, and a PBWP and at most one SBWP may be flexiblysupported, for example, based on the one or more configurations.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a MAC CEto activate or deactivate an SBWP, for example, if an SBWP activation ordeactivation is not urgent (e.g., not time sensitive). The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) DCI to switch from a first PBWP to a secondBWP as a second PBWP and/or to switch from a first SBWP to a third BWPas a second SBWP. The base station may send the DCI to switch a BWP, forexample, if BWP switching is urgent (e.g., time sensitive, such as forURLLC).

FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 27C, and FIG. 27D show examples of a MAC CE anda corresponding MAC subheader for one or more SBWPs (or one or morePBWPs) activation/deactivation. FIG. 27A shows an example of the MAC CEcomprising at least one of: one or more first fields indicatingactivation or deactivation of one or more DL BWPs; and/or one or moresecond fields indicating activation or deactivation of one or more ULBWPs. The one or more first fields may comprise a quantity of bits(e.g., D4, D3, D2, and D1 for four bits associated with four DL BWPs,respectively). Di may indicate activation/deactivation (e.g., activationor deactivation) of the DL BWP associated with DL BWP ID=i (e.g., i=1,2, 3, and 4). As shown in FIG. 27A, Di (i=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspondto four most significant bits of an octet 2 (Oct 2). The Oct 2 maycomprise 8 bits and each of the 8 bits may be associated with an index(e.g., index k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7). k may be i+3, for example,if Di (i=1, 2, 3, and 4) corresponds to four most significant bits ofthe Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=4, 5, 6, and 7). Each of thenumber of bits may indicate activation of a corresponding DL BWP, forexample, based on the bit being set to a first value (e.g., 1). Each ofthe number of bits may indicate deactivation of a corresponding DL BWP,for example, based on the bit being set to a second value (e.g., 0). D4being set to the first value may indicate a DL BWP associated with a BWPID 4 is activated if the DL BWP is configured. D4 being set to thesecond value may indicate the DL BWP associated with the BWP ID 4 isdeactivated if the DL BWP is configured. The wireless device may ignorethe value of D4, for example, if the DL BWP associated with the BWP ID 4is not configured. The wireless device may activate/deactivate a DL BWPassociated with a BWP ID 3 based on a value of D3, for example, if theDL BWP associated with the BWP ID 3 is configured. The wireless devicemay activate/deactivate a DL BWP associated with a BWP ID 2 based on avalue of D2, for example, if the DL BWP associated with the BWP ID 2 isconfigured. The wireless device may activate/deactivate a DL BWPassociated with a BWP ID 1 based on a value of D1, for example, if theDL BWP associated with the BWP ID 1 is configured. An RRC message mayindicate an association between a DL BWP and a BWP ID (e.g., the mappingrelationships between the BWP ID 1 and a first DL BWP, between the BWPID 2 and a second DL BWP, between the BWP ID 3 and a third DL BWP,and/or between the BWP ID 4 and a fourth DL BWP). An RRC message may notuse the indexes i, j and/or k. The RRC message may indicate that thefour DL BWPs and/or the four UL BWPs are associated with one of theeight indexes (e.g., the index k).

The one or more second fields may comprise a quantity of bits (e.g., U4,U3, U2, and U1 for 4 bits associated with four UL BWPs, respectively).Uj may indicate activation/deactivation (e.g., activation ordeactivation) of the UL BWP associated with UL BWP ID=j (e.g., j=1, 2,3, and 4). As shown in FIG. 27A, Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond tofour least significant bits of the Oct 2. k may be j−1, for example, ifUj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) corresponds to four least significant bits of theOct 2 identified by the indexes (k=0, 1, 2, and 3). Each of the numberof bits may indicate activation of a corresponding UL BWP, for example,based on the bit being set to a first value (e.g., 1), if the UL BWP isconfigured. Each of the number of bits may indicate deactivation of acorresponding UL BWP, for example, based on the bit being set to asecond value (e.g., 0), if the UL BWP is configured. The wireless devicemay ignore the value of Uj, for example, if the UL BWP associated withthe UL BWP ID j is not configured.

FIG. 27B shows an example of the MAC CE comprising at least one of: oneor more first fields indicating activation or deactivation of one ormore DL BWPs; and/or one or more second fields indicating activation ordeactivation of one or more UL BWPs. The configuration shown in FIG. 27Bis similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 27A, for example, exceptthat Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) corresponds to four most significant bits ofthe Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=4, 5, 6, and 7) and that Di (i=1,2, 3, and 4) corresponds to four least significant bits of the Oct 2identified by the indexes (k=0, 1, 2, and 3). k may be j+3, and k may bei−1.

FIG. 27C shows an example of the MAC CE comprising at least one of: oneor more first fields indicating activation or deactivation of one ormore DL BWPs; and/or one or more second fields indicating activation ordeactivation of one or more UL BWPs. The configuration shown in FIG. 27Cis similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 27A, for example, exceptthat Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) corresponds to four odd-numbered bits of theOct 2 identified by the indexes (k=1, 3, 5, and 7) and that Di (i=1, 2,3, and 4) corresponds to four even-numbered bits of the Oct 2 identifiedby the indexes (k=0, 2, 4, and 6). k may be 2j−1, and/or k may be 2i−2.Also or alternatively, Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to foureven-numbered bits of the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=0, 2, 4,and 6) and Di (i=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to four odd-numberedbits of the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=1, 3, 5, and 7). k may be2j−2, and/or k may be 2i−1. A base station and/or a wireless device maydynamically use the eight bits of the Oct 2. The four most significantbits may be used for other purposes or may be reserved, for example, ifthe wireless device is configured with two DL BWPs (e.g., DL BWPsassociated with D1 and D2) and with two UL BWPs (e.g., UL BWPsassociated with U1 and U2). Two least significant bits (e.g., associatedwith D1 and U1) may always have the first value (e.g., 1), for example,a primary DL BWP and a primary UL BWP are designated (e.g.,semi-statically). The two least significant bits may always have thefirst value (e.g., 1), for example, for the configurations of FIGS. 26A,26B, and 26C (e.g., the primary DL BWP and the primary UL BWP areunswitchable).

FIG. 27D shows an example of the MAC subheader for BWPactivation/deactivation. The MAC subheader may comprise at least one of:a reserved field; a flag field; an LCID field with a first valueindicating the MAC CE for BWP activation/deactivation; and/or a lengthfield. The LCID field may indicate the first value different from otherLCID values (e.g., other LCID values as shown in FIG. 18 and/or FIG.19). The MAC subheader may not comprise the length field, for example,based on the MAC CE for SBWP activation/deactivation having a fixed bitlength.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs to switchfrom a first PBWP to a second BWP as a second PBWP or switch from afirst SBWP to a third BWP as a second SBWP, for example, if one or moreMAC CEs are used for activating/deactivating one or more SBWPs. The basestation may send the one or more DCIs to switch from the first PBWP tothe second BWP or switch from the first SBWP to the third BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: one or more values of one or morefields of the one or more DCIs; and/or whether the one or more DCIs aretransmitted on a PBWP or an SBWP.

The wireless device may switch the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWPindicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based onat least one of: the one or more DCIs being transmitted on the PBWP;and/or the BWP indicator indicating the first BWP different from thePBWP and from the SBWP (e.g., if configured). The wireless device mayswitch the SBWP to a second BWP as a new SBWP indicated (e.g.,identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of:the one or more DCIs being transmitted on the SBWP; and/or the BWPindicator indicating the second BWP different from the PBWP and from theSBWP.

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) aPBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching), for example, after or in responseto the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP (e.g., without SBWPswitching/activation), for example, after or in response to the BWPindicator indicating the SBWP. The wireless device may receive one ormore DL data packets from a first PDSCH mapped on the PBWP, for example,after or in response to receiving the DL assignment via the PBWP. Thewireless device may receive one or more DL data packets from a secondPDSCH mapped on the SBWP, for example, after or in response to receivingthe DL assignment via the SBWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPBWP switching or a PDSCH scheduling on a PBWP or on an SBWP, forexample, if the PBWP and at most one SBWP of a plurality of BWPs aresupported and/or one or more MAC CEs are used foractivating/deactivating an SBWP. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs indicating the PBWP switching or the PDSCH scheduling on thePBWP or on the SBWP, for example, based on a BWP indicator. The wirelessdevice may switch the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWP indicated (e.g.,identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on the BWPindicator indicating the first BWP different from the PBWP and from theSBWP (e.g., if configured). The wireless device may receive a DLassignment on (e.g., sent via) a PBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching),for example, after or in response to the BWP indicator indicating thePBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sentvia) an SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching/activation), for example,after or in response to the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. Thewireless device may receive one or more DL data packets from a firstPDSCH mapped on the PBWP, after or in response to receiving the DLassignment via the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a second PDSCH mapped on the SBWP, for example, afteror in response to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP. CombiningMAC CE for SBWP activation/deactivation and DCI for PBWP/SBWP switchingmay reduce blind decoding complexity and dynamical signaling overhead(e.g., DCI for SBWP activation/deactivation) to support multiple activeBWPs in a cell.

One or more MAC CEs for SBWP activation/deactivation may introduceintolerant transition latency (e.g., scheduling the MAC CE in PDSCHresources and sending one or more HARQ feedback for the MAC CE inPUCCH/PUSCH resources) for some services (e.g., URLLC services). Awireless device may receive multiple types of services, at least some ofwhich may require a quick SBWP activation/deactivation. The transitionlatency may be reduced and/or avoided by introducing a first DCI format,different from one or more other (e.g., existing) DCI formats (e.g., DCIformat 1_0/1_1). The first DCI format may comprise one or more fieldsindicating a PBWP switching, an SBWP activation, an SBWP deactivation,and/or an SBWP switching based on one or more values of the one or morefields of the first DCI format. The first DCI format may comprise atleast one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field (e.g., BWPaction/mode indication) indicating one of a PBWP switching, an SBWPactivation, an SBWP deactivation, and/or an SBWP switching.

FIG. 28A shows an example of a first DCI format comprising a BWP IDfield and a second field. The second field may be an action indicationfield (e.g., a field indicating an action associated with a BWPindicated by the BWP ID field). A wireless device may switch a PBWP to afirst BWP as a new PBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesone or more DCIs based on the first DCI format. The wireless device mayswitch the PBWP to the first BWP, for example, based on at least one of:the BWP indicator (e.g., a BWP ID in the BWP ID field) indicating thefirst BWP; the first BWP being different from the PBWP; and/or thesecond field being set to a first value (e.g., “00” if a size of thesecond field corresponds to two bits). The wireless device may receive aDL assignment on (e.g., sent via) a PBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching),for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP and/or thesecond field being set to the first value (e.g., “00”).

The wireless device may activate a second BWP as an SBWP, for example,if the wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the firstDCI format. The wireless device may activate the second BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thesecond BWP; and/or the second field being set to a second value (e.g.,“01” if the size of the second field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may deactivate an SBWP, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCI format. Thewireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP; and the second fieldbeing set to a third value (e.g., “10”).

The wireless device may switch an SBWP to a third BWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may switch the SBWP to the third BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thethird BWP; the third BWP being different from the PBWP and from theSBWP; and/or the second field being set to a fourth value (e.g., “11” ifthe size of the second field corresponds to two bits). The wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP (e.g.,without SBWP switching), for example, after or in response to the BWPindicator indicating the SBWP and/or the second field being set to thefourth value (e.g., “11”).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) first DCI based on an existingDCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0/1_1) indicating PBWP/SBWP switchingand/or indicating a DL scheduling on the PBWP/SBWP. A base station maysend (e.g., transmit) second DCI based on second DCI format (e.g.,different from the existing DCI format) indicating SBWPactivation/deactivation. The second DCI format may comprise at least oneof: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field indicating activation ordeactivation of an SBWP.

FIG. 28B shows an example DCI format comprising a BWP ID field and asecond field. A wireless device may switch from the PBWP to a first BWPas a new PBWP, for example, if the wireless device receives the firstDCI based on a particular DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format, suchas DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format). The wireless device mayreceive first DCI, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicatingthe first BWP different from the PBWP and/or first DCI being transmittedvia the PBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g.,sent via) the PBWP, for example, after or in response to the BWPindicator indicating the PBWP.

A wireless device may switch from the SBWP to a second BWP as a newSBWP, for example, if the wireless device receives first DCI based on aparticular DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format). The wireless device may receive thefirst DCI, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the secondBWP different from the SBWP and/or the first DCI being transmitted viathe SBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sentvia) the SBWP, for example, after or in response to the BWP indicatorindicate the SBWP.

A wireless device may activate a third BWP indicated by the BWPindicator as a second SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesthe second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCIformat 1_0/1_1). The wireless device may activate the third BWP, forexample, based on the second field of the second DCI being a first value(e.g., “1” if a size of the second fields corresponds to one bit).

A wireless device may deactivate the SBWP indicated by the BWPindicator, for example, if the wireless device receives the second DCIbased on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCI format1_0/1_1). The wireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example,based on the second field of the second DCI being a second value (e.g.,“0”).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI based on a third DCI format(e.g., different from an existing format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, orany other DCI format) indicating a PBWP switching or an SBWP activation,for example, if at most one SBWP is supported. The third DCI format maycomprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second fieldindicating a PBWP switching or an SBWP activation. The PBWP switching orthe SBWP activation may be indicated based on a value of the secondfield. Activation of a BWP as a new SBWP may deactivate an active SBWPand activate the BWP as the new SBWP (e.g., at a time), for example, ifat most one SBWP is supported.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) the DCI based on the third DCIformat to a wireless device. The wireless device may switch from thePBWP to a first BWP indicated by the BWP indicator, as a new PBWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the DCI and at most one SBWP issupported. The wireless device may switch from the PBWP to the firstBWP, for example, based on the second field being a first value (e.g.,“1” if a size of the second field corresponds to one bit). The wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) the PBWP, forexample, if the BWP indicator indicates the PBWP.

The wireless device may activate a second BWP indicated by the BWPindicator, as a new SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesthe DCI based on the third DCI format and at most one SBWP is supported.The wireless device may activate the second BWP, for example, based onthe second field being a second value (e.g., “0” if a size of the secondfield corresponds to one bit). The wireless device may deactivate afirst SBWP (e.g., if the first SBWP is configured and in active state),for example, after or in response to activating the second BWP. Thewireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) theSBWP, for example, if the BWP indicator indicates the SBWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs (e.g., DCIformat 1_0/1_1), to a wireless device, indicating an SBWP activation, anSBWP deactivation, or an SBWP switching, for example, based on at leastone of: one or more values of one or more fields of the one or moreDCIs; and/or whether the one or more DCIs are transmitted via a PBWP orvia an SBWP. The one or more DCIs may be transmitted based on DCI format1_0 or 1_1 indicating a PDSCH scheduling. The one or more fields maycomprise at least one of: a carrier indicator; an identifier for a DCIformat; a BWP indicator; a first field indicating a frequency domainresource assignment; a second field indicating a time domain resourceassignment; a PUCCH resource indicator; a TPC command for a scheduledPUCCH; and/or a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator. Reusing anexisting DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 1_1) for a BWP operationsupporting multiple active BWPs may reduce blind decoding complexity ata wireless device. A PBWP may be in active state, for example, at leastuntil receiving an RRC message.

The wireless device may switch the SBWP to a first BWP as a new SBWPindicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based onat least one of: the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the SBWP;the BWP indicator indicating the first BWP different from the PBWP andfrom the SBWP; a value of the first field or the second field beingdifferent from a first value (e.g., all zeros); and/or the value of thefirst field or the second field being different from a second value(e.g., all ones). The first value and/or the second value may bepredefined (e.g., fixed).

The wireless device may activate a second BWP as a new SBWP indicated(e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the second BWP different from thePBWP and from the SBWP; and/or the value of the first field or thesecond field being the first value (e.g., all zeros). The wirelessdevice may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at least one of:the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; the BWP indicatorindicating the SBWP different from the PBWP; and/or the value of thefirst field or the second field being the second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) aPBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP. Thewireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP(e.g., without SBWP switching/activation/deactivation), for example,based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wireless device mayreceive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH mapped on thePBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving the DL assignmentvia the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DL datapackets from a second PDSCH mapped on the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP.

The base station and the wireless device may dynamically activate anSBWP, deactivate an SBWP, and/or switch an SBWP to a new SBWP, forexample, based on one or more fields of one or more DCIs. Transitionlatency and/or implementation cost of the wireless device may bereduced, and/or multiple active BWPs may be flexibly supported.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating anSBWP activation, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP aresupported. The base station may send the one or more DCIS indicating theSBWP activation, for example, based on at least one of: the BWPindicator indicating a BWP different from the PBWP (e.g., if there is noSBWP in the cell); the BWP indicator indicating the BWP different fromthe SBWP; the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; and/orthe one or more DCIs being transmitted via the SBWP.

Activation of an SBWP may comprise deactivating a first SBWP andactivating a first inactive BWP as the SBWP (e.g., at a time).Activation of an SBWP may comprise activating a first inactive BWP asthe SBWP, for example, if there is no active SBWP before the activating.

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP (e.g.,without PBWP switching), for example, based on the BWP indicatorindicating the PBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment viaan SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching/activation), for example, based onthe BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wireless device may receiveone or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH via the PBWP, forexample, after or in response to receiving the DL assignment via thePBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DL data packets from asecond PDSCH via the SBWP, for example, after or in response toreceiving the DL assignment via the SBWP. Blind decoding complexityand/or implementation cost of the wireless device may be reduced, and/ora PBWP and an SBWP (e.g., at most one SBWP) may be flexibly supported.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a MAC CEto activate or deactivate an SBWP, for example, if an SBWP activation ordeactivation is not urgent (or time sensitive). The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) DCI to switch from a first SBWP to a second BWP asa second SBWP, for example, if a PBWP is in an active state untilswitched by an RRC message. FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 27C, and FIG. 27Dshow examples of a MAC CE and a corresponding MAC subheader for one ormore SBWP activation/deactivation.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs (e.g., DCIformat 1_0/1_1) to switch from a first SBWP to a second BWP as a secondSBWP, for example, if one or more MAC CEs are used foractivating/deactivating an SBWP and the PBWP is always in active stateuntil switched by an RRC message. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs to switch from the first SBWP to the second BWP, for example,based on at least one of: one or more values of one or more fields ofthe one or more DCIs; and/or whether the one or more DCIs aretransmitted via a PBWP or via an SBWP. The wireless device may switch afirst SBWP to a second BWP as a second SBWP indicated (e.g., identified)by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of: the one ormore DCIs being transmitted via the first SBWP; and/or the BWP indicatorindicating the second BWP different from the PBWP and from the firstSBWP.

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP, for example,based on the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via an SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching), forexample, based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wirelessdevice may receive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH viathe PBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving the DLassignment via the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a second PDSCH via the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPDSCH scheduling on a PBWP or an SBWP, for example, if a PBWP and atmost one SBWP of a plurality of BWPs are supported and one or more MACCEs are used for activating/deactivating an SBWP. The base station maysend the one or more DCIs indicating the PDSCH scheduling, for example,based on a BWP indicator of the one or more DCIs. The wireless devicemay receive a DL assignment via a PBWP, for example, based on the BWPindicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device may receive a DLassignment via an SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching/activation), forexample, based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wirelessdevice may receive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH viathe PBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving the DLassignment via the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a second PDSCH via the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP.

A wireless device may perform SBWP switching based on the one or moreMAC CEs. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) the one or more MACCEs indicating an activation of a second SBWP and/or a deactivation of afirst SBWP, for example, by setting a second field of the one or morefirst fields corresponding the second SBWP to a first value (e.g., “1”)and/or setting a first field of the one or more first fieldscorresponding to the first SBWP to a second value (e.g., “0”). Thewireless device may switch from the first SBWP to the second SBWP, forexample, after or in response to receiving the one or more MAC CEs.Combining MAC CE for SBWP activation/deactivation and DCI for SBWPswitching may reduce blind decoding complexity and/or dynamic signalingoverhead (e.g., DCI for SBWP activation/deactivation) to supportmultiple active BWPs in a cell.

One or more MAC CEs for SBWP activation/deactivation may introduceintolerant transition latency (e.g., which may be caused by schedulingthe MAC CE in PDSCH resources at a base station and sending one or moreHARQ feedbacks for the MAC CE in PUCCH/PUSCH resources at a wirelessdevice) for some services (e.g., URLLC). A wireless device may receivemultiple types of services, which may require a quick SBWPactivation/deactivation. The transition latency may be reduced, forexample, by introducing a first DCI format, which may be different fromone or more other DCI formats (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCIformat 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format). The first DCI format maycomprise one or more fields indicating SBWPactivation/deactivation/switching based on one or more values of the oneor more fields of the first DCI format. The first DCI format maycomprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; a second field (e.g., BWPaction/mode indication) indicating one of SBWP activation, SBWPdeactivation, and/or SBWP switching, for example, if a PBWP is in activestate until switched/deactivated by an RRC message.

FIG. 29A shows an example of a first DCI format comprising a BWP IDfield and an action indication field (e.g., a second field forindicating a change of a BWP). A wireless device may receive a DLassignment via a PBWP, for example, if the wireless device receives oneor more DCIs based on the first DCI format. The wireless device mayreceive the DL assignment via the PBWP, for example, based on a BWPindicator indicating the PBWP and/or the second field being set to afirst value (e.g., “00” if a size of the second field corresponds to twobits). A wireless device may receive a DL assignment via an SBWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives one or more DCIs based on thefirst DCI format. The wireless device may receive the DL assignment viathe SBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWPand/or the second field being set to a first value (e.g., “00”).

The wireless device may activate a first BWP as an SBWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may activate the first BWP as an SBWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thefirst BWP; and/or the second field being set to a second value (e.g.,“01” if a size of the second field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may deactivate an SBWP, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCI format. Thewireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP; and the second fieldbeing set to a third value (e.g., “10”).

The wireless device may switch an SBWP to a second BWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may switch the SBWP to the second BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thesecond BWP; the second BWP being different from the PBWP and from theSBWP; and/or the second field being set to a fourth value (e.g., “11”).

FIG. 29B shows an example of second DCI format comprising a BWP ID fieldand an action indication field (e.g., a second field for indicating achange of a BWP). A base station may send (e.g., transmit) first DCIbased on a DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format) indicating SBWP switching, or DLscheduling on the PBWP/SBWP. A base station may send (e.g., transmit)second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., different from theexisting DCI format, such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCIformat) indicating SBWP activation/deactivation. The second DCI formatmay comprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second fieldindicating activation or deactivation of an SBWP.

A wireless device may switch from the SBWP to a first BWP as a new SBWP,for example, if the wireless device receives the first DCI based on theDCI format (e.g., an existing such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any otherDCI format). The wireless device may switch from the SBWP to the firstBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the first BWPdifferent from the SBWP and/or the first DCI being transmitted via theSBWP.

A wireless device may activate a second BWP indicated by the BWPindicator as a second SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesthe second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCIformat 1_0/1_1 or another DCI format). The wireless device may activatethe second BWP as the second SBWP, for example, based on the secondfield of the second DCI being a first value (e.g., “1” if a size of thesecond field corresponds to one bit). A wireless device may deactivatethe SBWP indicated by the BWP indicator, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives the second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g.,different from DCI format 1_0/1_1 or another DCI format). The wirelessdevice may deactivate the SBWP indicated by the BWP indicator, forexample, based on the second field of the second DCI being a secondvalue (e.g., “0”).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI based on a DCI format(e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any otherDCI format) indicating an SBWP activation, for example, if at most oneSBWP is supported. A wireless device may activate a first BWP as asecond SBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating thefirst BWP is different from a first SBWP and from the PBWP. Theactivating the first BWP as the second SBWP may comprise deactivatingthe first SBWP and activating the first BWP as the second SBWP (e.g., ata time), for example, if at most one SBWP is supported and the PBWP isin active state at least until switched/deactivated by an RRC message.The activating the first BWP as the second SBWP may comprise activatingthe first BWP as the second SBWP, for example, if there is no SBWPbefore the activating and/or if at most one SBWP is supported and thePBWP is in an active state at least until switched/deactivated by an RRCmessage.

A wireless device may support a plurality of active BWPs in a cell, forexample, if a determination of a PBWP or an SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs is not performed. A base station may send (e.g., transmit)one or more DCIs indicating an active BWP switching, a BWP activation, aBWP deactivation, or a PDSCH scheduling on the active BWP, for example,based on at least one of: one or more values of one or more fields ofthe one or more DCIs. The one or more DCIs may be sent (e.g.,transmitted) based on a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 1_1, or anyother DCI format) indicating a PDSCH scheduling. The one or more fieldsmay comprise at least one of: a carrier indicator; an identifier for aDCI format; a BWP indicator; a first field indicating a frequency domainresource assignment; a second field indicating a time domain resourceassignment; a PUCCH resource indicator; a TPC command for scheduledPUCCH; and/or a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator. Reusing a DCIformat (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format 1_0 or 1_1, orany other DCI format) for a BWP operation supporting multiple activeBWPs may reduce blind decoding complexity at a wireless device.

A wireless device (e.g., with active BWPs in active state) may switchfrom a first active BWP to a second BWP indicated (e.g., identified) bythe BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of: the one ormore DCIs being transmitted via the first active BWP; the BWP indicatorindicating the second BWP different from the active BWPs; one or morevalues of the first field and/or the second field being different from afirst value (e.g., all zeros); and/or the value of the first field orthe second field being different from a second value (e.g., all ones).

A wireless device (e.g., tith active BWPs in active state) may activatea third BWP indicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thethird BWP different from the active BWPs; and/or the value of the firstfield or the second field being the first value (e.g., all zeros). Awireless device (e.g., with active BWPs in active state) may deactivatean active BWP, for example, based on at least one of: the BWP indicatorindicating the active BWP; and/or the value of the first field or thesecond field being the second value (e.g., all ones).

A wireless device may receive a DL assignment via an active BWP (e.g.,without active BWP switching), for example, based on at least one of:the BWP indicator indicating the active BWP; the value of the firstfield or the second field not being the first value (e.g., all zeros);and/or the value of the first field or the second field not being thesecond value (e.g., all ones). The wireless device may receive one ormore DL data packets from a PDSCH via the active BWP, for example, afteror in response to receiving the DL assignment via the active BWP.

A base station and/or a wireless device may dynamicallyswitch/activate/deactivate a BWP based on one or more fields of one ormore DCIs. Blind decoding complexity and implementation cost of thewireless device may be reduced and/or multiple active BWPs may beflexibly supported.

A wireless device may support a plurality of active BWPs in a cell, forexample, if a determination of a PBWP or an SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs is not performed. A base station may send (e.g., transmit),to a wireless device, a MAC CE to activate or deactivate a BWP, forexample, if BWP activation or deactivation is not urgent (e.g., not timesensitive). The base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI to switchfrom a first active BWP to a second BWP as a second active BWP. FIG.27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 27C, and FIG. 27D show examples of a MAC CE and acorresponding MAC subheader for one or more BWP activation/deactivation.

A wireless device (e.g., with active BWPs in active state) may switchfrom a first active BWP to a second BWP indicated (e.g., identified) bythe BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of: the BWPindicator indicating the second BWP different from the active BWPs;and/or the DCI being transmitted via the first active BWP. A wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment via an active BWP (e.g., withoutactive BWP switching), for example, based on the BWP indicatorindicating the active BWP. A wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a PDSCH via the active BWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the active BWP.

A wireless device may support a plurality of active BWPs in a cell, forexample, if a determination of a PBWP or an SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs is not performed. One or more MAC CEs for SBWPactivation/deactivation may introduce intolerant transition latency(e.g., caused by scheduling the MAC CE in PDSCH resources and sendingone or more HARQ feedbacks for the MAC CE in PUCCH/PUSCH resources) forsome services (e.g., URLLC). A wireless device may receive one or moreof multiple types of services, at least some of which may require quickSBWP activation/deactivation. The transition latency by introducing afirst DCI format, different from one or more other DCI formats (e.g., anexisting DCI format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCIformat), may be improved. The first DCI format may comprise one or morefields indicating one of BWP switching, BWP activation, and/or BWPdeactivation, for example, based on one or more values of the one ormore fields of the first DCI format. The first DCI format may compriseat least one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field (e.g., BWPaction/mode indication) indicating one of BWP switching, BWP activation,and/or BWP deactivation.

FIG. 30A shows an example of a first DCI format comprising a BWP IDfield and an action indication field (e.g., a second field forindicating a change of a BWP). A wireless device may switch a firstactive BWP to a first BWP as a second active BWP, for example, if thewireless device receives one or more DCIs based on the first DCI formatand multiple BWPs are in active state. The wireless device may switchthe first active BWP to the first BWP, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the first BWP; the first BWP beingdifferent from the multiple BWPs; and/or the second field being set to afirst value (e.g., “00” if a size of the second field corresponds to twobits). The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via an active BWP(e.g., without BWP switching), for example, based on the BWP indicatorindicating the active BWP and/or the second field being set to a firstvalue (e.g., “00” if a size of the second field corresponds to twobits).

The wireless device may activate a second BWP as an active BWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based onthe first DCI format and multiple BWPs are in active state. The wirelessdevice may activate the second BWP as an active BWP, for example, basedon at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating the second BWP; and/orthe second field being set to a second value (e.g., “01” if the size ofthe second field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may deactivate an active BWP, for example, if thewireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat and multiple BWPs are in active state. The wireless device maydeactivate the active BWP, for example, based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating the active BWP; and the second field being setto a third value (e.g., “10” if the size of the second field correspondsto two bits).

The wireless device may switch a first active BWP to a third BWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based onthe first DCI format and multiple BWPs are in active state. The wirelessdevice may switch the first active BWP to the third BWP, for example,based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating the third BWP;the third BWP being different from the multiple BWPs; and/or the secondfield being set to a fourth value (e.g., “11” if the size of the secondfield corresponds to two bits).

FIG. 30B shows an example of a second DCI format comprising a BWP IDfield and an action indication field (e.g., a second field forindicating a change of a BWP). A base station may send (e.g., transmit)first DCI based on a DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format such asDCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format) indicating BWP switching,and/or DL scheduling on an active BWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) second DCI based on the secondDCI format (e.g., different from the first DCI format and/or differentfrom an existing DCI format) indicating BWP activation/deactivation. Thesecond DCI format may comprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; and/ora second field indicating activation or deactivation of a BWP.

A wireless device may switch from a first active BWP to a first BWP as asecond active BWP, for example, if the wireless device receives thefirst DCI based on a DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format such asDCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format) and multiple BWPs are inactive states. The wireless device may switch from the first active BWPto the first BWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating thefirst BWP different from the multiple active BWPs and/or the first DCIbeing transmitted via the first active BWP. The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via the first active BWP, for example, if theBWP indicator indicates the first active BWP.

A wireless device may activate a third BWP indicated by the BWPindicator as a second active BWP, for example, if the wireless devicereceives the second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., differentfrom DCI format 1_0/1_1 or another DCI format). The wireless device mayactivate the third BWP as the second active BWP, for example, based onthe second field of the second DCI being a first value (e.g., “1” if asize of the second field corresponds to one bit).

A wireless device may deactivate an active BWP indicated by the BWPindicator, for example, if the wireless device receives the second DCIbased on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCI format1_0/1_1). The wireless device may deactivate the active BWP, forexample, based on the second field of the second DCI being a secondvalue (e.g., “0” if the size of the second field corresponds to onebit).

Some wireless devices (e.g., wireless devices compatible with LTE,LTE-Advanced, NR, etc.; and/or any other wireless device) may performvarious monitoring in a cell. Such wireless devices may monitor adownlink radio link quality of a cell (e.g., a PCell or a PSCell). Suchwireless devices may monitor a downlink radio link quality for detectionof a failure event (e.g., failure event detection). A failure event maycomprise, for example, a beam failure, a radio link failure, and/or anyother loss and/or degradation of communication via one or morecommunication paths. The wireless device may monitor the downlink radiolink quality, for example, for the purpose of a failure event indicationto a higher layer of the wireless device (e.g., a MAC layer or an RRClayer). One or more wireless resources (e.g., BWPs) may be configured onthe cell. The one or more wireless resources (e.g., BWPs) may comprisedownlink resources (e.g., downlink BWPs) and/or uplink resources (e.g.,uplink BWPs). The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) and/orreceive messages via an active resource (e.g., a single active BWP) ofthe one or more resources (e.g., BWPs) configured on the cell. Some orall of other resources (e.g., BWPs) configured on the cell may beinactive. The wireless device may monitor the downlink radio linkquality on an active resource (e.g., an active BWP). The wireless devicemay refrain from monitoring the downlink radio link quality, forexample, on other resources (e.g., other BWPs, such as inactive BWPs) ofthe one or more resources (e.g., BWPs) that may be configured on thecell.

FIG. 31 shows an example of a configuration of BWPs and RSs in a cell3106. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messagesand/or data packets to a wireless device. The one or more messagesand/or data packets may be received by a wireless device. The one ormore messages and/or data packets may comprise configuration parameters.The configuration parameters may comprise, for example, resourceconfiguration parameters such as BWP configuration parameters for one ormore BWPs of a cell 3106. The cell 3106 may comprise a PCell, a PSCell,an SCell, or any other type of cell. The one or more BWPs may comprise afirst BWP, a second BWP, and/or a third BWP (or any quantity of BWPs orother resources) of the cell 3106. The first BWP of the cell 3106 may bein an active state. The second BWP and the third BWP of the cell 3106may each be in an inactive state.

The configuration parameters may comprise one or more failure eventconfiguration parameters, for example, for each of the one or more BWPs.The one or more failure event configuration parameters may comprise aset of reference signal (RS) resource configurations for each BWP of theone or more BWPs. Each set of RS resource configurations may compriseone or more RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) for a corresponding BWPof the one or more BWPs. A first set of RS resource configurations maycomprise one or more RSs (e.g., CSI-RS or SS blocks) for the first BWP.The wireless device may measure a downlink radio link quality associatedwith the one or more RSs for the first BWP for failure event detection,for example, for the first BWP and/or the cell 3106. A first RS set maybe used for failure event detection associated with the first BWP whenthe first BWP is in active state, a second RS set may be used forfailure event detection associated with a second BWP when the second BWPis in active state, and a third RS set may be used for failure eventdetection associated with a third BWP when the third BWP is in activestate. Any quantity of RS sets may be used for failure event detectionassociated with any quantity of wireless resources (e.g., BWPs). The oneor more failure event configuration parameters may comprise one or morethresholds for failure event detection.

FIG. 32 shows an example of monitoring a downlink radio link quality. Awireless device 3202 may monitor a downlink radio link quality in anactive BWP (e.g., the first BWP) for failure event detection. Thewireless device 3202 may be in a service coverage of cell 3206. The cell3206 may comprise one or more resources (e.g., BWPs), such as a firstBWP (BWP1), a second BWP (BWP2), and/or any other BWPs (BWPN). The firstBWP may be active (e.g., BWP1). The second BWP (BWP2) may be inactive.Other BWPs (BWPN) may be inactive. The physical layer of the wirelessdevice 3202 may provide (e.g., send) an indication, for example, via ahigher layer (e.g., a MAC layer) of the wireless device 3202, based onmonitoring the downlink radio link quality. The physical layer of thewireless device 3202 may send one or more indications, for example, ifthe downlink radio link quality for the one or more RSs for the firstBWP has a block error rate (BLER) greater than a threshold. Thethreshold may comprise a failure event detection threshold that may besent via one or more failure event configuration parameters or otherconfiguration parameters. The wireless device may periodically (e.g.,according to an indication period) provide (e.g., send) the one or moreindications to a higher layer. The duration of one or more indicationperiods (e.g., periodicity) may be determined based on the one or morefailure event configuration parameters. The wireless device 3202 maydetermine a failure event, for example, based on the one or moreindications received by a higher layer of the wireless device 3202.

A cell may be configured with two or more active resources (e.g., two ormore active BWPs in a cell). A wireless device may perform failure eventdetection on the two or more active resources (e.g., two or more activeBWPs). Power consumption of the wireless device may increase, forexample, if the wireless device performs RLM, BFD, or other failureevent operation on the two or more active BWPs. The wireless device mayperform RLM, BFD, or other failure event operation on an active resource(e.g., a single active BWP) from the two or more active resources (e.g.,two or more active BWPs). The wireless device may select (e.g.,autonomously select) an active resource (e.g., an active BWP) from thetwo or more active resources (e.g., from two or more active BWPs).Measurement accuracy for failure event detection may be reduced, forexample, if the wireless device performs failure event on an activeresource (e.g., on the active BWP) that may be determined (e.g.,selected) autonomously by the wireless device.

A wireless device may perform failure event detection for each activeresource (e.g., each active BWP) separately. A base station may beconfigured with two or more active resources (e.g., a first active BWPand a second active BWP in a cell). The wireless device may perform afirst failure event detection for a first active resource (e.g., thefirst active BWP). The wireless device may perform a second failureevent detection for a second active resource (e.g., a second activeBWP). The wireless device may detect a failure event, for example, basedon the first failure event detection and/or the second failure eventdetection.

A wireless device may perform failure event detection for each activeresource (e.g., each active BWP) jointly. A base station may beconfigured with two or more active resources (e.g., a first active BWPand a second active BWP in a cell). The wireless device may performfailure event detection on a first active resource (e.g., the firstactive BWP) and a second active resource (e.g., the second active BWP)jointly. The wireless device may detect a failure event from a failureevent detection that may be based on the first active BWP and the secondactive BWP.

A wireless device may perform failure event detection via an activeresource (e.g., via an active BWP) of the two or more active resource(e.g., BWPs). The active resource (e.g., BWP) may be determined (e.g.,selected) based on one or more criteria. The active resource (e.g., BWP)that may be determined (e.g., selected) may be aligned between thewireless device and a base station, for example, based on one or morerules (e.g., predefined rule, rule sent by RRC message, etc.).

A base station may communicate with a wireless device via two or moreactive BWPs in a cell (e.g., a PCell, a PSCell, an SCell, etc.). The twoor more active BWPs may each be a downlink BWP. The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) one or more types of data services via differentactive BWPs in parallel (e.g., simultaneously and/or overlapped intime). The wireless device may receive the one or more types of dataservices via different active BWPs in parallel (e.g., simultaneouslyand/or overlapped in time). The wireless device may perform failureevent detection, for example, if two or more active BWPs are in anactive state in the cell. The wireless device may be unable to determinehow to perform failure event detection on the cell using an active BWP,for example, if two or more active BWPs overlap in time in the cell. Thewireless device may be unable to determine how to select the active BWPfrom the two or more active BWPs to perform failure event detection. Thewireless device may be unable to determine how to provide a failureevent detection indication, for example, if the wireless device iscapable of performing failure event detection on the two or more activeBWPs in parallel (e.g., based on downlink radio link qualities on thetwo or more active BWPs). FIGS. 33-40 show examples of failure eventdetection on a cell (e.g., a PCell, a PSCell, an SCell, etc.) by awireless device, for example, if the cell is configured with two or moreactive resource (e.g., two or more active BWPs).

FIG. 33 shows an example of failure event detection for two or moreactive resources (e.g., two or more active BWPs). The failure eventdetection may be performed separately, for example, separate failureevent detection per resource (e.g., per BWP). A base station 3304 maysend (e.g., transmit) one or more messages and/or data packets to thewireless device 3302. The wireless device 3302 may receive the one ormore messages and/or data packets. The one or more messages and/or datapackets may comprise configuration parameters of a cell 3306. The cell3306 may comprise, for example, a PCell, a PSCell, an SCell, or anyother cell type. The configuration parameters may comprise BWPconfiguration parameters for one or more BWPs. The one or more BWPs maycomprise a first BWP, a second BWP, a third BWP. The first BWP may be anactive BWP. The second BWP may be an active BWP. The third BWP may be aninactive BWP. The configuration parameters may comprise one or morefailure event detection configuration parameters for each BWP of the oneor more BWPs (e.g., for each of the first BWP and the second BWP, forexample if the first BWP is active and/or the second BWP is active). Theone or more failure event detection configuration parameters maycomprise a set of BWP-specific RS resource configurations for each BWPof the one or more BWPs. A first set of BWP-specific RS resourceconfigurations for the first BWP may comprise one or more first RSs(e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) associated with the first BWP. A secondset of BWP-specific RS resource configurations for the second BWP maycomprise one or more second RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks)associated with the second BWP. The one or more first RSs may be RSs ofthe first BWP (e.g., a first RS set for failure event detection). Theone or more second RSs may be RSs of the second BWP (e.g., a second RSset for failure event detection).

The base station 3304 and/or the wireless device 3302 may activate twoor more BWPs of the one or more BWPs. The two or more BWPs may comprisea first BWP and a second BWP. Activating the two or more BWPs maycomprise activating the first BWP of the two or more BWPs in a firstslot and/or activating a second BWP of the two or more BWPs in a secondslot. The first slot may be different from the second slot. The firstslot may or overlap with the second slot. The first slot may refrainfrom overlapping with the second slot.

Each BWP of the two or more BWPs may be associated with a set ofBWP-specific RS resources for failure event detection. Failure eventdetection may comprise providing one or more failure event detectionindications. A first set of BWP-specific RS resources for the first BWPmay comprise one or more first RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks)associated with the first BWP. A second set of BWP-specific RS resourcesfor the second BWP may comprise one or more second RSs (e.g., CSI-RSand/or SS blocks) associated with the second BWP.

The wireless device 3302 may perform failure event detection on each ofthe two or more BWPs, for example, based on the two or more BWPs beingin active state in the cell 3306. Failure event detection may compriseassessing a downlink radio link quality on each of the two or more BWPs(e.g., the first BWP and the second BWP). Failure event detectionassessing a downlink radio link quality may comprise evaluating thedownlink radio link quality based on comparing measurements ofBWP-specific resources, associated with the first BWP and the secondBWP, with one or more thresholds. A threshold may correspond to a valuesent or provided by a higher layer (e.g., an RRC layer or a MAC layer)of the wireless device 3302. The threshold may be BWP-specific. Thethreshold may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to the cell 3306).

The physical layer of the wireless device 3302 may compare a firstdownlink radio link quality of the one or more first RSs to a firstthreshold. The physical layer of the wireless device 3302 may compare asecond downlink radio link quality of the one or more second RSs to asecond threshold. The first threshold may correspond to a value sent orprovided by a higher layer of the wireless device 3302 (e.g., an RRClayer or a MAC layer). The second threshold may be a second value sentor provided by a higher layer of the wireless device 3302 (e.g., the RRClayer or the MAC layer).

The physical layer of the wireless device 3302 may send a failure eventdetection indication for each of the two or more BWPs, for example, ifthe downlink radio link quality, based on the set of BWP-specificresources of each of the two or more BWPs, has a BLER that is greaterthan a threshold. The physical layer of the wireless device 3302 maysend or provide a failure event detection indication to a higher layer(e.g., the MAC layer) of the wireless device 3302. The wireless device3302 may send or provide a failure event detection indication via ahigher layer periodically (e.g., based on a period specific to a BWP).The physical layer of the wireless device 3302 may send or provide afirst failure event detection indication for the first BWP via a higherlayer (e.g., the MAC layer), for example, if the first downlink radiolink quality (e.g., based on a set of first BWP-specific resources ofthe first BWP) has a BLER that is greater than a first threshold. Thewireless device 3302 may send or provide a first failure event detectionindication via a higher layer periodically (e.g., based on a periodspecific to the BWP). The physical layer of the wireless device 3302 maysend or provide a second failure event detection indication for thesecond BWP to a higher layer (e.g., the MAC layer), for example, if thesecond downlink radio link quality (e.g., based on a set of secondBWP-specific resources of the second BWP) has a BLER that is greaterthan the second threshold. The wireless device 3302 may send or providethe second failure event detection indication to a higher layerperiodically (e.g., based on a period specific to the BWP).

Performing failure event detection indication on the first BWP of thetwo or more BWPs may be independent from performing failure eventdetection on the second BWP of the two or more BWPs. The wireless device3302 may determine a failure event based on one or more indications(e.g., a failure detection event indication, a first failure eventdetection indication, and/or a second failure event detectionindication) received by a higher layer of the wireless device 3302.

The cell 3306 may be associated with one or more RSs (e.g., RS1, RS2, .. . , RSN) and/or one or more BWPs (e.g., BWP1, BWP2 and BWP3, . . . ).BWP1 may be associated with RS1, RS2 and RS3, for example, for failureevent detection. BWP2 may be associated with RS2, RS3, RS4 and RS5, forexample, for failure event detection. BWP3 may be associated with RS5,RS6, . . . , RSN. The wireless device 3302 may perform a first failureevent detection based on RS1, RS2 and RS3. The wireless device 3302 mayperform a second failure event detection based on RS2, RS3, RS4 and RS5on BWP2, for example, if BWP1 and BWP2 are in an active state.

FIG. 34 shows an example of the wireless device 3402 performing failureevent detection on one or more frames. The physical layer of thewireless device 3402 may indicate a first failure event detectionindication (e.g., periodically based on a first BWP-specific period) ona first active BWP. The physical layer of the wireless device 3402 mayindicate the first failure event detection indication to a higher layerof the wireless device 3402 (e.g., the MAC layer or the RRC layer). Thephysical layer of the wireless device 3402 may indicate a second failureevent detection indication (e.g., periodically based on a secondBWP-specific period) on a second active BWP. The physical layer of thewireless device 3402 may indicate the second failure event detectionindication to a higher layer of the wireless device 3402. The firstindications may be associated with first indication periods. The secondindications may be associated with second indication periods. The firstindication periods may be different from, and/or may refrain fromoverlapping with, the second indication periods.

The wireless device 3402 may assess downlink radio link quality of twoor more active BWPs in the cell. The wireless device 3402 may detect afailure event, for example, based on downlink radio link qualities ofthe two or more active BWPs. Measurement results of downlink radio linkquality may be more accurate based on the two or more active BWPsrelative to measurement results of downlink radio link quality on asingle active BWP. Unnecessary failure event detection may be avoidedand/or additional declaration of a failure event may be avoided, forexample, if the wireless device 3402 assesses downlink radio linkquality of two or more active BWPs in the cell. Indicating one or morefailure event detection indications on one or more active BWPs with oneor more different periodicities may increase efficiency for failureevent detection.

FIG. 35 shows an example of failure event detection on two or moreactive BWPs. The failure event detection may be performed on two or moreactive BWPs jointly. A base station 3504 may send (e.g., transmit), to awireless device 3502, one or more messages and/or data packets. Thewireless device 3502 may receive the one or more messages and/or datapackets. The one or more messages and/or data packets may compriseconfiguration parameters of a cell 3506. The cell 3506 may comprise aPCell. The cell may comprise a PSCell of an SCG, for example, if thecell 3506 comprises the SCG. The cell 3506 may comprise an SCell or anyother cell type. The configuration parameters may indicate that the cell3506 comprises one or more BWPs. The configuration parameters mayindicate a set of resources (e.g., one or more RSs) on one or more BWPsfor failure event detection. The set of resources may be indicated by aset of resource indexes. The set of resources may be a subset of one ormore SS/PBCH blocks and/or of one or more CSI-RS resources. The one ormore messages and/or data packets may indicate one or more thresholdscomprising a first threshold for evaluating the downlink radio linkquality of the cell 3506.

The base station 3504 and/or the wireless device 3502 may activate twoor more BWPs of the one or more BWPs (e.g., BWP1 and BWP2). Each of thetwo or more BWPs may be associated with a set of resources for failureevent detection.

The wireless device 3502 may perform failure event detection on the twoor more BWPs, for example, if the two or more BWPs are in an activestate in the cell 3506. Failure event detection may comprise assessing,for example, at least one time per an indication period, a downlinkradio link quality on the two or more BWPs. Assessing a downlink radiolink quality on the two or more BWPs may comprise comparing the downlinkradio link quality, based on one or more sets of resources associatedwith the two or more active BWPs, over a time period to a threshold. Thethreshold may correspond to a value sent by a higher layer (e.g., an RRClayer or a MAC layer) of the wireless device 3502. The threshold may beBWP-specific. The threshold may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to thecell 3506).

The cell 3506 may be associated with one or more RSs (e.g., RS1, RS2, .. . , RSN) and one or more BWPs (e.g., BWP1, BWP2 and BWP3, . . . ).BWP1 may be associated with a first set of BWP-specific RS resources(e.g., RS1, RS2, and RS3) for a first failure event detection. BWP2 maybe associated with a second set of BWP-specific RS resources (e.g., RS2,RS3, RS4, and RS5) for a second failure event detection. BWP1 and BWP2may be in an active state. The physical layer of the wireless device3502 may assess a downlink radio link quality of the cell 3506, forexample, based on one or more sets of RSs comprising the first set ofBWP-specific RS resources and the second set of BWP-specific RSresources. The one or more set of RSs may comprise, for example, RS1,RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5. The physical layer of the wireless device 3502may assess the downlink radio link quality of the cell 3506 by comparingthe one or more sets of RSs over a time period to the threshold.

The physical layer of the wireless device 3502 may send a failure eventdetection indication via a higher layer of the wireless device 3502, forexample, based on the downlink radio link quality assessed. The downlinkradio link quality may be assessed based on the one or more sets of RSs.The physical layer of the wireless device 3502 may send the failureevent detection indication, for example, if the one or more sets of RSshas a BLER greater than the threshold, for example, in one or moreframes. The wireless device 3502 may perform failure event detectionoperation of the cell 3506, for example, jointly on one or more activeBWPs (e.g., the BWP1 and the BWP2).

FIG. 36 shows an example of failure event detection (e.g., on one ormore frames and/or subframes). A wireless device 3602 may performfailure event detection operation jointly on a first BWP (BWP1) and asecond BWP (BWP2), for example, on the one or more frames and/orsubframes. The physical layer of the wireless device 3602 may send afailure event detection indication based on the failure event detectionwith an indication period on the one or more frames 3602. The physicallayer of the wireless device 3602 may send a failure event detectionindication (e.g., periodically) based on the failure event detection.The physical layer of the wireless device 3602 may perform the failureevent detection based on one or more sets of RSs of BWP1 and BWP2. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 3602 may send the failure eventdetection indication via a higher layer of the wireless device 3602(e.g., the MAC layer or the RRC layer). The higher layer of the wirelessdevice 3602 may determine a failure event based on a quantity of thefailure event detection indications. The higher layer of the wirelessdevice 3502 may determine a failure, for example, if the quantity offailure event detection indications equals or is greater than a failureevent detection threshold.

The physical layer of the wireless device 3602 may provide via a higherlayer of the wireless device 3602 a failure event detection indicationwith an indication period (e.g., periodically). The failure eventdetection indication may be based on failure event detection on one ormore sets of RSs of two or more active BWPs. Inefficiencies of a failureevent detection indication to the higher layer of the wireless device3602 may be reduced by performing the failure event detection on one ormore sets of RSs of two or more active BWPs. Inefficiencies ofdetermining a failure event may be reduced. A higher layer of thewireless device 3602 may reuse failure event detection resources tosupport two or more active BWPs in the cell, for example, by performingfailure event detection on one or more sets of RSs of two or more activeBWPs.

A first downlink radio link quality on a first active BWP of the two ormore active BWPs may correspond with a second downlink radio linkquality on a second active BWP of the two or more active BWPs. Powerconsumption of the wireless device may be increased by performingfailure event detection on two or more active BWPs independently. Byperforming failure event detection operation jointly on a first BWP(BWP1) and a second BWP (BWP2), or on any quantity of multiple activeBWPs jointly, the wireless device 3602 may conserve power and performaccurate failure event detection for multiple active BWPs.

FIG. 37 shows an example of a failure event detection on a determined(e.g., selected) active resource (e.g., a selected active BWP). Awireless device 3702 may perform failure event detection that may resultin a reduced power consumption, for example, by the wireless device 3702determining (e.g., selecting) an active BWPs from multiple active BWPs.A base station 3704 may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messagesand/or data packets. The wireless device 3702 may receive the one ormore messages and/or data packets. The one or more messages and/or datapackets may comprise configuration parameters of a cell 3706. The cell3706 may comprise a PCell. The cell may comprise a PSCell of an SCG, forexample, if the cell 3706 comprises the SCG. The cell may comprise anSCell or any other cell type.

The configuration parameters may indicate that the cell 3706 comprisesone or more BWPs. The configuration parameters may indicate a set ofresources (e.g., one or more RSs) on at least one BWP of the one or moreBWPs for failure event detection. The set of resources may be indicatedby a set of resources indexes. The set of resources may be a subset ofone or more SS/PBCH blocks and/or one or more CSI-RS resources. The oneor more messages and/or data packets may indicate one or more thresholdscomprising a first threshold for evaluating a downlink radio linkquality of the cell 3706. The first threshold may be cell-specific(e.g., specific to the cell 3706). The first threshold may beBWP-specific. The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicatea first BWP-specific threshold associated with each BWP of the one ormore BWPs.

The base station 3704 and/or the wireless device 3702 may activate twoor more BWPs of the BWPs (e.g., the BWP1 and the BWP2). Each of the twoor more BWPs may be associated with a set of resources for failure eventdetection. The wireless device 3702 may select a BWP of the two or moreBWPs based on one or more criteria. The wireless device may performfailure event detection on the BWP determined (e.g., selected) based onthe one or more criteria. The one or more criteria may comprise at leastone of: a BWP index; a numerology index; a service type; a failure eventdetection RSs configuration; a PDCCH configuration; and/or any otherindication.

Each of the two or more BWPs may be indicated by a BWP index. Thewireless device 3702 may select the BWP of the two or more BWPs with alowest BWP index of the two or more BWPs. The wireless device 3702 mayperform failure event detection on the BWP. The BWP with the lowest BWPindex may be a BWP on which the wireless device 3702 receives systeminformation. Monitoring on the BWP with the lowest BWP index may helpmaintain a non-interrupted link for receiving system information, forexample, from base station 3704. The wireless device 3702 may select theBWP with a highest BWP index of the two or more BWPs. The BWP with thehighest BWP index may be a BWP on which the wireless device 3702receives urgent data packets (e.g., URLLC). Monitoring on the BWP withthe highest BWP index may help maintain a non-interrupted link forreceiving urgent data packets, for example, from the base station 3704.

Each of the two or more BWPs may be associated with a numerology index.The wireless device 3702 may select the BWP of the two or more BWPs witha lowest numerology index among the two or more BWPs. The BWP with thelowest numerology index may be a BWP on which the wireless device 3702receives system information and/or paging information. Monitoring on theBWP with the lowest numerology index may help maintain a robust link forreceiving system information and/or paging information, for example,from the base station 3704. The wireless device 3702 may select the BWPof the two or more BWPs with a highest numerology index among the two ormore BWPs. The wireless device may perform failure event detection onthe BWP.

Each of the two or more BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specificfailure event detection maximum counter. The wireless device 3702 mayselect the BWP of the two or more BWPs with a lowest BWP-specificfailure event detection maximum counter among the two or more BWPs.Failure event detection may be performed faster based on the BWP withthe lowest BWP-specific failure event detection maximum counter. Arobust link with the base station 3704 may be faster based on monitoringon the BWP with the lowest BWP-specific failure event detection maximumcounter. The wireless device 3702 may select the BWP of the two or moreBWPs with a highest BWP-specific failure event detection maximum counteramong the two or more BWPs. The wireless device 3702 may perform failureevent detection on the BWP.

The base station 3704 may send (e.g., transmit) a first type of service(e.g., eMBB) on a first active BWP of the two or more active BWPs. Thebase station 3704 may send (e.g., transmit) a second type of service(e.g., MTC) on a second active BWP of the two or more active BWPs. Thefirst type of service may be prioritized over the second type of service(e.g., by the wireless device 3702). The wireless device 3702 may selectthe BWP from the first active BWP and the second active BWP based on atype of service with a highest priority among the first type of serviceand the second type of service.

The first active BWP may be configured with failure event detection RSs.The second active BWP may lack configuration with failure eventdetection RSs. The wireless device 3702 may select the BWP to be thefirst active BWP that may be configured with failure event detectionRSs. The first active BWP may be configured with PDCCH resources. Thesecond active BWP may lack configuration with PDCCH resources. Thewireless device 3702 may select the BWP to be the first active BWP thatmay be configured with PDCCH resources. The first active BWP may beconfigured with common search space for PDCCH monitoring. The secondactive BWP may lack configuration with common search space for PDCCHmonitoring. The wireless device may select the BWP to be the firstactive BWP that may be configured with common search space.

The first active BWP may be a primary active BWP. The second active BWPmay be a secondary active BWP. The wireless device 3702 may select theBWP to be the primary active BWP. The wireless device may performfailure event detection on the primary active BWP. The primary activeBWP may be a BWP on which the wireless device 3702 may: perform aninitial connection establishment procedure; initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure; and/or monitor PDCCH candidates in one ormore common search spaces for DCI formats with CRC scrambled by anSI-RNTI, an RA-RNTI, a TC-RNTI, a P-RNTI, an INT-RNTI, an SFI-RNTI, aTPC-PUSCH-RNTI, a TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, a TPC-SRS-RNTI, a CS-RNTI, anSP-CSI-RNTI, and/or a C-RNTI. The primary active BWP may be a BWP thatmay be maintained in an active state, for example, at least until theBWP is switched to another BWP (e.g., by an RRC message). The primaryactive BWP may be a first BWP in a licensed band. The secondary activeBWP may be a second BWP in an unlicensed band. The primary active BWPmay be a first BWP used with a first radio interface (e.g., a Uuinterface between a base station and a wireless device). The secondaryactive BWP may be a second BWP used with a second radio interface (e.g.,a sidelink interface between a first wireless device and a secondwireless device).

The two or more active BWPs may be grouped into two active BWP groups.The wireless device 3702 may select a first active BWP from a first BWPgroup and a second active BWP from a second BWP group. The first BWPgroup may be in a low frequency (e.g., <6 GHz or other frequency). Thesecond BWP group may be in a high frequency (e.g., >6 GHz or otherfrequency). The first BWP group may be in a licensed band. The secondBWP group may be in an unlicensed band. The first active BWP and thesecond active BWP may be primary active BWPs. The wireless device 3702may perform failure event detection on the first active BWP and thesecond active BWP independently. Monitoring the first active BWP in thelow frequency and the second active BWP in the high frequency mayprovide the higher layer of the wireless device 3702 more radio linkinformation over a wide bandwidth.

The wireless device 3702 may perform failure event detection on the BWP(e.g., the selected active BWP of the two or more active BWPs). Failureevent detection may comprise assessing a radio link quality on the BWP,for example, determined (e.g., selected) based on one or more criteria.The downlink radio link quality may be assessed at least one time perindication period. Assessing a radio link quality on the determined(e.g., selected) active BWP may comprise evaluating the downlink radiolink quality based on, for example, comparing failure event detectionRSs associated with the BWP over a time period to the threshold. A firstBWP (BWP1) may be associated with the first RS set for failure eventdetection (e.g., RS1, RS2, and RS3). A second BWP (BWP2) may beassociated with the second RS set for failure event detection (e.g.,RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5). A third BWP (BWP3) may be associated with thethird RS set for failure event detection (e.g., RS5, RS6, . . . RSN).BWP1 and BWP2 may be in an active state. The wireless device 3702 mayselect a BWP from BWP1 and BWP2 for failure event detection, forexample, based on the one or more criteria. The determined (e.g.,selected) BWP may be BWP1 based on the one or more criteria. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 3702 may assess a downlink radiolink quality of the cell 3706 based on RS1, RS2 and RS3 of BWP1. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 3702 may assess the downlink radiolink quality of the cell 3706 based on RS 1, RS2 and RS3 of BWP1, forexample, by comparing the downlink radio quality link over a time periodto the threshold.

FIG. 38 shows an example of failure event detection. The failure eventdetection may be on one or more frames and/or subframes. The wirelessdevice 3802 may select a first BWP (BWP1) to perform failure eventdetection based on the one or more criteria. The physical layer of thewireless device 3802 may send a failure event detection indication via ahigher layer of the wireless device 3802, for example, based on anindication period on the one or more frames and/or subframes. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 3802 may send a failure eventdetection indication via the higher layer of the wireless device 3802,for example, periodically.

The wireless device 3802 may detect a failure event based on a firstfailure event detection counter of the BWP1 being equal to or greaterthan a first number or quantity. The first quantity may be configuredbased on one or more RRC messages.

The wireless device 3802 may select an active BWP (e.g., BWP1) of two ormore active BWPs (e.g., BWP1 and BWP 2) to perform failure eventdetection. Inefficiencies of failure event detection at the wirelessdevice 3802 may be reduced by determining (e.g., selecting) an activeBWP of the two or more active BWPs. Power consumption at the wirelessdevice 3802 may be reduced by determining (e.g., selecting) an activeBWP of the two or more active BWPs for failure event detection. Speed offailure event detection at the wireless device 3802 may be increased bydetermining (e.g., selecting) an active BWP of the two or more activeBWPs.

FIG. 39 shows an example method for detecting a failure event. At step3902, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messages. The one ormore RRC messages may be received from a base station. The one or moreRRC message may comprise configuration parameters of a cell. The cellmay comprise one or more BWPs. Each BWP of the one or more BWPs may beindicated by a BWP-specific index. Each BWP of the one or more BWPs maybe associated with one or more RSs, for example, for failure eventdetection. Failure event detection may comprise at least one of afailure event detection indication and/or initiation of a recoveryprocedure.

At step 3904, the wireless device may activate two or more BWPs of theBWPs. At step 3906, the wireless device may select at least one BWP ofthe two or more BWPs based on one or more criteria. At step 3908, thewireless device may perform failure event detection, for example, basedon the one or more reference signals associated with the at least oneBWP. At step 3910, the wireless device may determine a failure event.The failure event may be detected based on failure event detectionperformed at step 3908. At step 3912, the wireless device may initiate arecovery procedure.

FIG. 40 shows an example method for a wireless device determining afailure event. The wireless device may determine the failure eventautonomously. The wireless device may determine the detection of afailure event with two or more active BWPs configured in a cell. A basestation may unaware of detection of a failure event by the wirelessdevice. At step 4002, the wireless device may receive one or moremessages and/or data packets. The one or more messages may comprise BWPconfiguration parameters. The one or more messages and/or data packetsmay comprise configuration parameters for failure event detection. Atstep 4004, one or more BWPs in the cell may be activated.

At step 4006, the wireless device may determine if a first condition ismet. Determining if the first condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are configured in an unlicensed band and/or if aspeed of failure event detection is to be increased. Step 4008 may beperformed if the first condition is met. At step 4008, the wirelessdevice may perform failure event detection on two or more active BWPs,for example, as shown in FIG. 33 and/or FIG. 34. Step 4010 may beperformed if the first condition is not met.

At step 4010, the wireless device may determine if a second condition ismet. Determining if the second condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are configured in a licensed band and/or if ameasurement accuracy of failure event detection is to be improved and/orif a robustness of failure event detection is to be improved. Step 4012may be performed if the second condition is met. At step 4012, thewireless device may perform failure event detection on two or moreactive BWPs, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 and/or FIG. 36. Step 4014may be performed if the second condition is not met.

At step 4014, the wireless device may determine if a third condition ismet. Determining if the third condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs have a similar channel quality (e.g., operateintra-band). Step 4016 may be performed if the second condition is met.At step 4016, the wireless device may perform failure event detection ona determined (e.g., selected) active BWP, for example, as shown in FIG.37, 38, and/or FIG. 39.

The steps shown in the method of FIG. 40 may be implemented in any orderand are not limited to the order shown in FIG. 40. For example, step4010 and/or step 4014 may be performed before or after step 4006, and/orstep 4014 may be performed before or after step 4006 and/or step 4010.The wireless device may determine performing failure event detection ontwo or more active BWPs, for example, if the wireless device is capableof monitoring radio link quality on the two or more active BWPs. Thewireless device may determine performing failure event detection on anactive BWP (e.g., jointly or independently), for example, if thewireless device is capable of monitoring radio link quality on theactive BWP. The wireless device may select (e.g., autonomously select)the active BWP from the two or more active BWPs.

A wireless device may be configured to perform some or all of theoperations described herein. The wireless device may be similar to, orthe same as, each of the wireless devices described herein, including,for example, wireless devices 3202, 3302, 3402, 3502, 3602, 3702, and3802.

Some wireless devices (e.g., wireless devices compatible with LTE,LTE-Advanced, NR, etc.; and/or any other wireless device) may performvarious monitoring for a cell. Such wireless devices may monitor adownlink radio link quality of a cell, such as a PCell (e.g., of anMCG). Such wireless devices may monitor a first downlink radio qualityof the PCell, for example, for the purpose of indicating an out-of-syncstatus and/or an in-sync status to a higher layer of the wireless device(e.g., a MAC layer or an RRC layer). One or more BWPs may be configuredon the PCell. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) and/orreceive, one or more messages and/or data packets via an active BWP(e.g., a single active BWP) of the one or more BWPs configured on thePCell. The other BWPs configured on the PCell (e.g., some or all of theother BWPs configured on the PCell) may be inactive. The wireless devicemay monitor the first downlink radio link quality in the active BWP. Thewireless device may refrain from monitoring the first downlink radiolink quality, for example, in other BWPs of the one or more BWPsconfigured on the PCell (e.g., may refrain from monitoring in anyinactive BWP).

Some wireless devices (e.g., wireless devices compatible with LTE,LTE-Advanced, NR, etc.; and/or any other wireless device) may monitor asecond downlink radio link quality of a PSCell of an SCG, for example,for the purpose of indicating an out-of-sync status and/or an in-syncstatus to a higher layer of the wireless device. The wireless device maymonitor the second downlink radio link quality of the PSCell of the SCG,for example, if the wireless device is configured with the SCG. Thewireless device may monitor the second downlink radio link quality ofthe PSCell of the SCG, for example, if a first parameter (e.g.,rlf-TimersAndConstantsSCG) is sent by the higher layer, for example, andis not set to release. One or more BWPs may be configured on the PSCell.The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) and/or receive one or moremessages and/or data packets via an active BWP (e.g., a single activeBWP) of the one or more BWPs configured on the PSCell. Other BWPsconfigured on the PSCell (e.g., some or all of the other BWPs configuredon the PCell) may be inactive. The wireless device may monitor thesecond downlink radio link quality in the active BWP. The wirelessdevice may refrain from monitoring the second downlink radio linkquality, for example, in other BWPs of the one or more BWPs configuredon the PSCell (e.g., may refrain from monitoring in any inactive BWP).

FIG. 41 shows an example of one or more message and/or data packets thata base station may send (e.g., transmit). The one or more messagesand/or data packets may be received by a wireless device. The one ormore messages and/or data packets may comprise parameters indicating atleast one of a first timer value for a first timer (e.g., t310), a firstnumber or quantity (e.g., n310), and a second number or quantity (e.g.,n311). The first timer value may be a value (e.g., 0, 50, 100, 200, 500,1000, 2000, etc.) for example, measured in milliseconds. The first timerand/or first timer value may be used by the wireless device to determinean RLF, for example, if the first timer expires. The first quantity maycomprise a positive number (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, etc.). Thefirst quantity may be used to count a consecutive number of out-of-syncindications. The second number may comprise a positive number (e.g., 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, etc.). The second number may be used to count aconsecutive number of in-sync indications.

The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise, for example,configuration parameters of one or more BWPs of a cell 4106. The cell4106 may comprise, for example, a PCell or a PSCell. The configurationparameters may indicate, for example, on each of the one or more BWPs, aset of resources (e.g., RSs) for radio link monitoring (RLM). The set ofresources may be indicated by a set of resource indexes (e.g., RS1, RS2,etc.). The set of resources may be referred to as RLM RSs. The set ofresources may comprise, for example, a subset of one or more SS/PBCHblocks and/or a subset of one or more CSI-RS resources. A first messagemay comprise a first RS set for RLM associated with a first BWP. Asecond message may comprise a second RS set for RLM associated with asecond BWP. A third message may comprise a third RS set for RLMassociated with a third BWP. Any quantity of messages may comprise acorresponding RS for RLM associated with a corresponding BWP or otherwireless resource. The first BWP may be associated with a first RS setfor RLM that may comprise, for example, RS1, RS2, and RS3. The secondBWP may be associated with a second RS set for RLM that may comprise,for example, RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5. The third BWP may be associatedwith a third RS set for RLM that may comprise, for example, RS5, RS6, .. . RSN. One or more RSs may be included in one or more RS sets for RLM(e.g., for overlapping RS sets).

The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise one or morethresholds, for example, for evaluating a downlink radio link quality ofthe cell 4106. The one or more thresholds may comprise a first threshold(e.g., Q_(out)) and/or a second threshold (e.g., Q_(in)). The firstthreshold, for example, may correspond to a first block error rate(BLER) value (e.g., 10⁻¹ or 10⁻²). The second threshold, for example,may correspond to a second BLER value (e.g., 10⁻² or 10⁻⁵).

FIG. 42 shows an example of monitoring a downlink radio link quality. Awireless device 4202 may monitor the downlink radio link quality in anactive BWP (e.g., BWP1). Other BWPs of a cell 4206, for example, may beinactive (e.g., BWP2 . . . BWPN). The wireless device 4202 may refrainfrom monitoring the downlink radio link quality, for example, in theother BWPs (e.g., may refrain from monitoring some or all inactiveBWPs). A physical layer of the wireless device 4202 may assess (e.g.,evaluate) the downlink radio link quality of the cell 4206 in a firstindication period. The physical layer of the wireless device 4202 mayassess the downlink radio link quality of the cell 4206 in the firstindication period, for example, if the wireless device 4202 is in anon-DRX mode of operation. The physical layer of the wireless device4202 may assess the downlink radio link quality at least one time perfirst indication period. The downlink radio link quality may be assessed(e.g., evaluated), for example, based on the set of resources, the firstthreshold (e.g., Q_(out)), and/or the second threshold (e.g., Q_(in)).The set of resources may comprise the first RS set for RLM associatedwith BWP1. The set of resources may refrain from including (e.g., mayexclude) some or all other RLM RSs. The downlink radio link quality maybe assessed, for example, by evaluating the set of resources against thefirst threshold (e.g., Q_(out)) and/or the second threshold (e.g.,Q_(in)), for example, over a time period. The first indication periodcomprise any amount of time, for example, a shortest periodicity of theset of resources (e.g., a maximum amount of time for the firstindication period) or a second amount of time (e.g., 10 ms).

A downlink radio link quality may be assessed, for example, byevaluating a set of resources against a first threshold (e.g., Q_(out))and/or a second threshold (e.g., Q_(in)), for example, over a timeperiod (e.g., a measurement period). A wireless device may derive, overthe time period, a BLER based on a hypothetical PDCCH transmissionassociated with the set of resources. The wireless device may generatean out-of-sync indication for the time period for example, if thederived BLER is greater than the first threshold. The wireless devicemay generate an in-sync indication for the time period, for example, ifthe derived BLER is less than the second threshold. The wireless devicemay indicate the out-of-sync indication and/or the in-sync indication tohigher layer of the wireless device with an indication periodicity thatmay be of any value.

The physical layer of the wireless device 4202 may assess (e.g.,evaluate) the downlink radio link quality of the cell 4206 in a secondindication period. The physical layer of the wireless device 4202 mayassess the downlink radio link quality of the cell 4206 in the secondindication period, for example, if the wireless device 4202 is in a DRXmode of operation. The physical layer of the wireless device 4202 mayassess the downlink radio link quality, for example, at least one timeper second indication period. The second indication period may compriseany amount of time, for example, a shortest periodicity of the set ofresources (e.g., a maximum amount of time for the second indicationperiod) or a second amount of time equal to a value of a DRX period.

The physical layer of the wireless device 4202 may indicate a firstindication (e.g., an out-of-sync indication) to a higher layer of thewireless device 4202, for example, based on the downlink radio linkquality assessed by the physical layer of the wireless device 4202. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 4202 may indicate the firstindication, for example, if a measurement for the set of resources(e.g., a corresponding BLER) fails to satisfy (e.g., is greater than)the first threshold (e.g., Q_(out)), for example, in one or more framesand/subframes.

The physical layer of the wireless device 4202 may indicate a secondindication (e.g., an in-sync indication) to the higher layer of thewireless device 4202, for example, based on the downlink radio linkquality assessed by the physical layer of the wireless device 4202. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 4202 may indicate the secondindication, for example, if a measurement for the set of resources(e.g., a corresponding BLER) satisfies (e.g., is less than) the secondthreshold (e.g., Q_(in)), for example, in one or more frames and/orsubframes.

The wireless device 4202 may perform RLM, for example, based on the setof resources, to determine downlink radio link quality of the cell 4206.The wireless device 4202 may refrain from performing RLM outside anactive BWP, for example, if the cell 4206 is configured with one or moreBWPs.

The wireless device 4202, in relation to the cell 4206, may start thefirst timer with the first timer value (e.g., t310), for example, basedon receiving a quantity (e.g., n310) of consecutive out-of-syncindications for the cell 4206 from and/or via one or more lower layers(e.g., a physical layer) of the wireless device 4202. The wirelessdevice 4202 may start the first timer using the first timer value (e.g.,t310), for example, based on a second timer (e.g., t311) not running.The second timer (e.g., t311) may be configured, for example, via one ormore RRC messages. The wireless device 4202 may start the second timer(e.g., t311), for example, based on initiating an RRC connectionre-establishment procedure. The wireless device 4202 may stop the secondtimer (e.g., t311), for example, based on determining (e.g., selecting)a cell (e.g., a suitable NR cell and/or a cell using a second RAT (e.g.,LTE or WIFI)). The second timer (e.g., t311) may expire, for example,based on the wireless device 4202 being in an RRC_IDLE state.

The wireless device 4202, in relation to the cell 4206, may stop thefirst timer (e.g., t310), for example, based on receiving a quantity(e.g., n311) of consecutive in-sync indications for the cell 4206 fromand/or via one or more lower layers (e.g., the physical layer) of thewireless device 4202. The wireless device 4202 may stop the first timer(e.g., t310), for example, based on the first timer (e.g., t310)running.

The wireless device 4202 may determine a radio link failure (e.g., RLF)is detected for an MCG, for example, based on the first timer (e.g.,t310) expiring in the cell 4206. The wireless device 4202 may initiate aconnection re-establishment procedure, for example, based on determiningdetection of the RLF of the MCG. The wireless device 4202 may initiatethe connection re-establishment procedure, for example, if an ASsecurity is activated. The wireless device 4202 may perform one or moreactions upon leaving an RRC_CONNECTED mode, for example, if the ASsecurity is not activated.

The wireless device 4202 may determine an RLF is detected for an SCG,for example, based on the first timer (e.g., t310) expiring in the cell4206. The wireless device 4202 may initiate an SCG failure informationprocedure to report an SCG RLF, for example, based on determining theRLF of the SCG.

A cell may be configured with one or more active BWPs. A wireless devicemay perform RLM on the one or more active BWPs (e.g., on some or all ofthe one or more active BWPs). Power consumption of the wireless devicemay increase, for example, if the wireless device performs RLM on morethan one active BWPs. The wireless device may perform RLM on an activeBWP (e.g., a single active BWP) from the one or more active BWPs. Thewireless device may select (e.g., autonomously select) the active BWPfrom the one or more active BWPs. Measurement accuracy for RLF detectionmay be reduced, for example, if the wireless device performs RLM on theactive BWP determined (e.g., selected) autonomously by the wirelessdevice, for example, without the base station knowing a basis fordetermining (e.g., selecting) the active BWP for the RLM by the wirelessdevice.

A wireless device may perform RLM for each active BWP separately. A basestation may be configured with two or more active BWPs (e.g., a firstactive BWP and a second active BWP). The wireless device may perform afirst RLM for the first active BWP. The wireless device may perform asecond RLM for the second active BWP. The wireless device may determinean RLF based, for example, on one or more of the first RLM or the secondRLM. The wireless device may perform RLM on each active BWP. The RLM ineach active BWP may be separately performed by the wireless device. Thewireless device may generate in-sync and/or out-of-sync indicationsbased on the RLM in each active BWPs. The in-sync and/or out-of-syncindications may be separate for each active BWP. The wireless device maydetermine an RLF based on the separate in-sync and/or out-of-syncindications.

Determining an RLF based on a first RLM and a second RLM, for example,performed separately may improve a speed and/or an accuracy of the RLF.Determining an RLF based on a first RLM and a second RLM, for example,performed separately may increase a quantity of out-of-sync and/orin-sync indications. Determining RLF based on performing the first RLMand the second RLM separately may reduce RLF detection error.Determining RLF based on performing the first RLM and the second RLMseparately may avoid unnecessarily triggering a connectionre-establishment procedure (e.g., if the first active BWP and the secondactive BWP are configured on a PCell in an unlicensed band).

A wireless device may perform RLM for each active BWP jointly (e.g.,together). A base station may be configured with two or more active BWPs(e.g., a first active BWP and a second active BWP). The wireless devicemay perform RLM on the first active BWP and the second active BWPjointly. The wireless device may determine an RLF based on RLM in thefirst active BWP and the second active BWP. The wireless device mayperform RLM based on combined RLM RSs on the two or more active BWPs(e.g., based on the combined RSs of the first active BWP and the secondactive BWP). The wireless device may generate in-sync and/or out-of-syncindications based on the combined RLM RSs. The wireless device maydetermine an RLF based on the in-sync and/or out-of-sync indications.

Performing RLM jointly on one or more active BWPs of a cell may improvein-sync or out-of-sync indications and/or may reduce a complexity of RLFdetection. Performing RLM jointly on one or more active BWPs of a cellmay reduce RLF detection error (e.g., by avoiding unnecessarilytriggering a connection re-establishment procedure).

A wireless device may perform RLM on an active BWP (e.g., a singleactive BWP) of the one or more active BWPs. The active BWP may bedetermined (e.g., selected) based on one or more criteria. The activeBWP determined (e.g., selected) may be aligned between the wirelessdevice and a base station based on one or more rules. The wirelessdevice may select the active BWP for RLM from the one or more activeBWPs based on one or more criteria. Monitoring RLM RSs on the active BWPof a cell may improve power consumption of the wireless device.Monitoring RLM RSs on the active BWP of a cell may improve downlinkspectrum efficiency (e.g., by not transmitting RLM RSs on other activeBWPs). Selection and/or alignment of an active BWP from one or moreactive BWPs of a cell for an RLM may reduce power consumption and/or mayreduce downlink signaling overhead (e.g., by avoiding sending RSs by abase station on an active BWP not selected for RLM).

A base station may communicate with a wireless device on one or moreactive BWPs in a cell (e.g., a PCell, a PSCell, an SCell, or any othercell type). The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more typesof data services via different active BWPs in parallel (e.g.,simultaneously and/or overlapped in time). The wireless device mayreceive the one or more types of data services via the different activeBWPs in parallel (e.g., simultaneously and/or overlapped in time). Thewireless device may perform RLM on the cell, for example, if one or moreBWPs are in an active state in the cell. The wireless device may beunable to determine how to perform RLM on the cell using an active BWP,for example, if one or more active BWPs overlap in time in the cell. Thewireless device may be unable to determine how to select the active BWPfrom the one or more active BWPs to perform RLM. The wireless device maybe unable to determine how to send a first indication (e.g., anout-of-sync indication) and/or to provide a second indication (e.g., anin-sync indication), for example, if the wireless device is capable ofperforming RLM on one or more active BWPs in parallel based on downlinkradio link qualities on the one or more active BWPs. RLM may beperformed on a cell (e.g., a PCell, a PSCell, an SCell, or any othercell type) by a wireless device, for example, if the cell is configuredwith one or more active BWPs.

FIG. 43 shows an example of RLM on at least two active BWPs separately.A base station 3310 may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device4302, one or more messages and/or data packets. The wireless device 4302may receive the one or more messages and/or data packets. The one ormore messages and/or data packets may comprise parameters indicating atleast one of a first timer value for a first timer (e.g., t310), a firstquantity (e.g., n310), and a second quantity (e.g., n311). The one ormore messages and/or data packets may comprise configuration parametersof a cell 4306. The cell 4306 may comprise any type of cell. The cell4306 may comprise a PCell. The cell 4306 may comprise a PSCell of anSCG, for example, if the cell 4306 comprises the SCG. The cell 4306 maycomprise an SCell or any other cell type. The configuration parametersmay indicate that the cell 4306 comprises one or more BWPs. Theconfiguration parameters may indicate a set of resources (e.g., RSs) onat least one BWP of the one or more BWPs for RLM. The set of resourcesmay be indicated by a set of resource indexes. The set of resources maycomprise a subset of one or more SS/PBCH blocks and/or one or moreCSI-RS resources.

The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicate one or morethresholds for evaluating the downlink radio link quality of the cell4306. The one or more thresholds may comprise a first threshold (e.g.,Q_(out)) and/or a second threshold (e.g., Q_(in)). The first thresholdand/or the second threshold may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to thecell 4306). The first threshold and/or the second threshold may beBWP-specific. The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicatea first BWP-specific threshold and/or a second BWP-specific thresholdassociated with one or more of (e.g., with each BWP of) the one or moreBWPs.

The base station 4304 and/or the wireless device 4302 may activate twoor more BWPs (e.g., at least two active BWPs) of the one or more BWPs.Each of the two or more BWPs that may be activated may be associatedwith a set of resources for RLM. The wireless device 4302 may performRLM on each of the two or more BWPs, for example, based on the two ormore BWPs each being in an active state in the cell 4302. RLM maycomprise assessing (e.g., evaluating), at least one time per indicationperiod, a downlink radio link quality on each of the two or more BWPs.The downlink radio link quality on an active BWP of the two or more BWPsmay be assessed, for example, based on a set of resources associatedwith the two or more active BWPs and the first threshold (e.g., thefirst cell-specific threshold or the first BWP-specific thresholdassociated with the first active BWP) and/or the second threshold (e.g.,the second cell-specific threshold or the second BWP-specific thresholdassociated with the second active BWP). The downlink radio link qualitymay be assessed, for example, based on comparing the set of resources tothe first threshold and/or the second threshold over a time period todetermine whether a measured quality (e.g., corresponding to a BLER)satisfies (e.g., is less than) a threshold (e.g., the first thresholdand/or the second threshold).

A physical layer of the wireless device 4302 may send a first indication(e.g., an out-of-sync indication) via a higher layer of the wirelessdevice 4302, for example, based on the downlink radio link qualityassessed by the physical layer of the wireless device 4302. The physicallayer of the wireless device 4302 may send the first indication, forexample, if the set of resources correspond to a BLER greater than thefirst threshold, for example, in one or more frames and/or subframes.The physical layer of the wireless device 4302 may send a secondindication (e.g., an in-sync indication) to a higher layer of thewireless device 4302, for example, based on the downlink radio linkquality assessed by the physical layer of the wireless device 4302. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 4302 may send the secondindication, for example, if the set of resources correspond to a BLERless than the second threshold, for example, in one or more framesand/or subframes. The wireless device 4302 may perform RLM on each ofthe two or more BWPs independently (e.g., performing RLM on a firstactive BWP may be independent of performing RLM on a second active BWPof the two or more active BWPs).

The cell 4306 (e.g., as a PCell) may be associated with one or more RSs(e.g., RS1, RS2, . . . , RSN) and one or more of BWPs (e.g., BWP1, BWP2and BWP3, . . . ). BWP1 may be associated with RS1, RS2 and RS3 for RLM.RS1, RS2, and RS3 may be a first RS set for RLM. BWP2 may be associatedwith RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5 for RLM. RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5 may be asecond RS set for RLM. BWP3 may be associated with RS5, RS6, . . . ,RSN. RS5, RS6, . . . , RSN may be a third RS set for RLM. The wirelessdevice 4302 may perform a first RLM based on RS1, RS2 and RS3 on BWP1.The wireless device 4302 may perform a second RLM based on RS2, RS3, RS4and RS5 on BWP2, for example, if BWP1 and BWP2 are in an active state.

The wireless device 4302 may start the first timer with the first timervalue (e.g., t310), for example, based on at least one of: receiving afirst quantity (e.g., n310) of consecutive out-of-sync indications forthe cell 4306 from a lower layer (e.g., a physical layer) of thewireless device 4302; and/or a second timer (e.g., t311) not running.The second timer (e.g., t311) may be configured via one or more RRCmessages.

One or more of the consecutive out-of-sync indications may comprise thefirst indication triggered by a first downlink radio link quality. Thefirst downlink radio quality may be assessed based on a first set ofresources associated with the first active BWP. The first downlink radioquality may correspond to a BLER. The wireless device 4302 may determinewhether a measurement corresponding to the first downlink radio quality(e.g., a BLER) fails to satisfy (e.g., is greater than) the firstthreshold (e.g., Q_(out)). One or more of the consecutive out-of-syncindications may comprise the second indication. The second indicationmay be triggered by a second downlink radio link quality assessed basedon a second set of resources associated with the second active BWPcorresponding to a BLER greater than the first threshold (e.g.,Q_(out)). The wireless device 4302 may stop the first timer (e.g., t310)for the cell 4306, for example, based on at least one of: receiving n311consecutive in-sync indications for the cell 3312 from the lower layer(e.g., the physical layer) of the wireless devices 3308; and/or thefirst timer t310 running. One or more consecutive in-sync indicationsmay comprise the first indication. The first indication may be triggeredby the first downlink radio link quality assessed based on the first setof resources associated with the first active BWP corresponding to aBLER less than the second threshold (e.g., Q_(in)). One or moreconsecutive in-sync indications may comprise the second indication. Thesecond indication may be triggered by the second downlink radio linkquality assessed based on the second set of resources associated withthe second active BWP corresponding to a BLER less than the secondthreshold (e.g., Q_(in)).

The wireless device 4302 may determine an RLF for an MCG, for example,based on the first timer expiring in relation to the cell 4306. Thewireless device 4302 may initiate a connection re-establishmentprocedure, for example, based on determining the RLF of the MCG. Thewireless device 4302 may initiate a connection re-establishmentprocedure, for example, if an AS security is activated. The wirelessdevice 4302 may perform one or more actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTEDmode. The wireless device 4302 may perform one or more actions uponleaving RRC_CONNECTED mode, for example, if the AS security is notactivated.

The wireless device 4302 may determine an RLF for an SCG, for example,based on the first timer expiring in the cell 4306. The wireless device4302 may determine the RLF for the SCG based on the first timer expiringin the cell 4306, for example, if the cell 4306 is a PSCell. Thewireless device 4302 may initiate an SCG failure information procedureto report the RLF for the SCG, for example, based on determining the RLFfor the SCG.

FIG. 44 shows an example performing RLM on one or more frames and/orsubframes. The physical layer of the wireless device 4402 may send oneor more first indications (e.g., out-of-sync and/or in-sync indications)associated with a first indication period on a first active BWP, forexample, to a higher layer of the wireless device 4402 (e.g., a MAClayer or an RRC layer). The physical layer of the wireless device 4402may indicate one or more second indications (e.g., out-of-sync and/orin-sync indications) associated with a second indication period on asecond active BWP, for example, to the higher layer of the wirelessdevice 4402. The higher layer of the wireless device 4402 may determinean RFL based on the one or more first indications and/or the one or moresecond indications.

The wireless device 4402 may assess downlink radio link quality of twoor more active BWPs in the cell. The wireless device 4402 may determinean RLF based on downlink radio link qualities of the two or more activeBWPs. Measurement results of downlink radio link quality may be moreaccurate based on the two or more active BWPs compared to measurementresults of downlink radio link quality on a single active BWP. Anunnecessary RLF determination may be avoided and/or an RRC reconnectionlatency may be reduced, for example, if the wireless device 4402assesses downlink radio link quality of the two or more active BWPs inthe cell.

One or more indications (e.g., out-of-sync and/or in-sync indications)on two or more active BWPs with one or more different periodicities maybe inefficient. Difficulties may arise in managing a first timer, afirst counter, and/or a second counter for RLF determination in a higherlayer of the wireless device 4402, for example, if a wireless devicereceives one or more indications from two or more active BWPs.

FIG. 45 shows an example of RLM on two or more active BWPs jointly. Awireless device 4502 may send efficient out-of-sync and/or in-syncindications, for example, if two or more BWPs are active. The wirelessdevice 4502 may perform RLF detection for the two or more active BWPs,for example, with reduced complexity. A base station 4504 may send(e.g., transmit), to the wireless device 4502, one or more messagesand/or data packets. The wireless device 4502 may receive the one ormore messages and/or data packets. The one or more messages and/or datapackets may comprise parameters indicating at least one of a first timervalue for a first timer (e.g., t310), a first quantity (e.g., n310), anda second quantity (e.g., n311).

The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise configurationparameters of the cell 4506. The cell 4506 may comprise any type ofcell. The cell 4506 may comprise a PCell. The cell 4506 may comprise aPSCell of an SCG, for example, if the cell 4506 comprises the SCG. Thecell 4506 may comprise an SCell or any other cell type. Theconfiguration parameters may indicate that the cell 4506 comprises oneor more BWPs. The configuration parameters may indicate a set ofresources (e.g., RSs) on a BWP of the one or more BWPs for RLM. The setof resources may be indicated by a set of resource indexes. The set ofresources may comprise a subset of one or more SS/PBCH blocks and/or oneor more CSI-RS resources. The one or more messages and/or data packetsmay indicate one or more thresholds for evaluating the downlink radiolink quality of the cell 4506. The one or more thresholds may comprise afirst threshold (e.g., Q_(out)) and/or a second threshold (e.g.,Q_(in)).

The base station 4504 and/or the wireless device 4502 may activate twoor more BWPs (e.g., two or more active BWPs) of the one or more BWPs.Each of the two or more BWPs that may be activated may be associatedwith a set of resources for RLM.

The wireless device 4502 may perform RLM on the two or more BWPs, forexample, based on the two or more BWPs being in an active state in thecell 4506. RLM may comprise assessing a downlink radio link quality onthe two or more BWPs. RLM may comprise assessing the downlink radio linkquality at least one time per indication period. Assessing the downlinkradio link quality on the two or more BWPs may comprise evaluating thedownlink radio link quality based on one or more sets of resourcesassociated with the two or more active BWPs over a time period. Thedownlink radio link quality may be assessed, for example, by comparingthe one or more sets of resources to the first and/or the secondthreshold. The downlink radio link quality may be assessed, for example,based on comparing the one or more sets of resources associated with thetwo or more active BWPs to the first threshold and/or the secondthreshold over a time period to determine whether a measured quality(e.g., corresponding to a BLER) satisfies (e.g., is less than) less thana threshold (e.g., the first threshold and/or the second threshold).

A first BWP (BWP1) may be associated with a first set RS set for RLM(e.g., RS1, RS2, and RS3). A second BWP (BWP2) may be associated with asecond RS set for RLM (e.g., RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5). A third BWP (BWP3)may be associated with a third RS set for RLM (e.g., RS5, RS6, . . .RSN). BWP1 and BWP2 may be in an active state. BWP3 may be in aninactive state. The first RS set for RLM may comprise a first set of oneor more RSs. The second RS set for RLM may comprise a second set of oneor more RSs. The third RS set for RLM may comprise a third set of one ormore RSs. Any quantity of RS sets may comprise a corresponding quantityof one or more RSs. The physical layer of the wireless device 4502 mayassess a downlink radio link quality of the cell 4506 based on one ormore sets of RSs comprising the first set of RSs and/or the second setof RSs. The one or more sets of RSs may comprise RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, andRS5. The physical layer of the wireless device 3508 may assess thedownlink radio link quality of the cell 4506 based on the one or moresets of RSs. The downlink radio quality may be assessed based on the oneor more sets of RSs and the first threshold and/or the second threshold,for example, over a time period.

The physical layer of the wireless device 4502 may send a firstindication (e.g., an out-of-sync indication) to a higher layer of thewireless device 4502, for example, based on evaluating the one or moresets of RSs. The one or more sets of RSs may correspond to a measuredBLER. The physical layer of the wireless device 4502 may send the firstindication, for example, if the measured BLER fails to satisfy (e.g., isgreater than) as the first threshold, for example, in one or more framesand/subframes. The physical layer of the wireless device 4502 mayindicate a second indication (e.g., an in-sync indication) to the higherlayer, for example, based on evaluating the one or more sets of RSs. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 4502 may send the secondindication, for example, if the measured BLER satisfies (e.g., is lessthan) the second threshold, for example, in one or more frames and/orsubframes. The wireless device 4502 may perform RLM of a cell jointly ontwo or more active BWPs.

The wireless device 4502 may start the first timer with the first timervalue (e.g., t310), for example, based on one or more of: receiving afirst quantity (e.g., n310) of consecutive out-of-sync indications forthe cell 4506 from a lower layer (e.g., a physical layer) of thewireless device 4502; and/or a second timer (e.g., t311) not running.The second timer (e.g., t311) may be configured via one or more RRCmessages.

The wireless device 4502 may stop the first timer (e.g., t310) for thecell 4506, for example, based on one or more of: receiving a secondquantity (e.g., n311) of consecutive in-sync indications for the cell4506 from the lower layer (e.g., the physical layer) of the wirelessdevice 4502; and/or the first timer (e.g., t310) running. The wirelessdevice 4502 may determine an RLF for an MCG, for example, based on thefirst timer expiring in relation to the cell 4506. The wireless device4502 may initiate a connection re-establishment procedure, for example,based on determining the RLF of the MCG. The wireless device 4502 mayinitiate a connection re-establishment procedure based on determiningthe RLF of the MCG, for example, if an AS security is activated. Thewireless device 3508 may perform one or more actions upon leavingRRC_CONNECTED mode. The wireless device 3508 may perform the one or moreactions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED mode, for example, if the AS securityis not activated.

The wireless device 4502 may determine an RLF for an SCG, for example,based on the first timer expiring in the cell 4506. The wireless device4502 may determine the RLF for the SCG based on the first timer expiringin the cell 3512, for example, if the cell 4506 comprises a PSCell. Thewireless device 3508 may initiate an SCG failure information procedureto report the RLF for the SCG, for example, based on determining the RLFfor the SCG.

FIG. 46 shows an example of performing RLM jointly on multiple BWPs. Awireless device 4602 may perform RLM jointly on BWP1 and BWP2 using oneor more frames and/or subframes. The physical layer of the wirelessdevice 4602 may send an indication (e.g., an out-of-sync and/or in-syncindication) based on RLM associated with an indication period. RLM maybe based on two or more sets of RSs of BWP1 and BWP2. The physical layerof the wireless device may send the indication to the higher layer ofthe wireless device 4602 (e.g., the MAC layer or the RRC layer). Thehigher layer of the wireless device 4602 may determine an RLF based onone or more of: the indication; the first timer (e.g., t310); the firstquantity (e.g., n310); and/or the second quantity (e.g., n311).

The physical layer of wireless device 4602 may send via the higher layerof the wireless device 4602 an indication (e.g., an out-of-sync and/oran in-sync indication) with an indication period. The indication may bebased on RLM on one or more sets of RSs of two or more active BWPs.Inefficiencies of the out-of-sync and/or the in-sync indications to thehigher layer of the wireless device 4602 may be reduced by performingRLM on one or more sets of RSs of two or more active BWPs.Inefficiencies of determining an RLF may be reduced. A higher layer ofthe wireless device 3508 may reuse RLF detection resources to supporttwo or more active BWPs in the cell, for example, by performing RLM onone or more sets of RSs of two or more active BWPs.

A first downlink radio link quality on a first active BWP of the two ormore active BWPs may be similar as a second downlink radio link qualityon a second active BWP of the two or more active BWPs. Power consumptionof the wireless device may be increased by performing RLM on two or moreactive BWPs independently or jointly. Enhanced methods are described forreducing power consumption of the wireless device for RLM. The methodsmay comprise at least one of: determining (e.g., selecting) one or moreactive BWPs from the multiple active BWPs; and/or performing radio linkmonitoring on the determined (e.g., selected) one or more active BWPs

FIG. 47 shows an example of RLM on a determined (e.g., selected) activeBWP. A wireless device 4702 may perform RLM determined (e.g., selected)active BWP using reduced power consumption. A base station 4704 may send(e.g., transmit), to the wireless device 4702, one or more messagesand/or data packets. The wireless device 4702 may receive the one ormore messages and/or data packets. The one or more messages and/or datapackets may comprise parameters indicating one or more of a first timervalue for a first timer (e.g., t310), a first quantity (e.g., n310), anda second quantity (e.g., n311).

The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise configurationparameters of a cell 4706. The cell 4706 may comprise any type of cell.The cell 4706 may comprise a PCell. The cell 4706 may comprise a PSCellof an SCG, for example, if the cell 4706 comprises the SCG. The cell4706 may comprise an SCell or any other cell type. The configurationparameters may indicate that the cell 4706 comprises one or more BWPs.The configuration parameters may indicate a set of resources (e.g., RSs)on one or more BWPs of the one or more BWPs for RLM. The set ofresources may be indicated by a set of resource indexes. The set ofresources may comprise a subset of one or more SS/PBCH blocks and/or oneor more CSI-RS resources.

The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicate one or morethresholds for evaluating the downlink radio link quality of the cell4706. The one or more thresholds may comprise a first threshold (e.g.,Q_(out)) and/or a second threshold (e.g., Q_(in)). The first thresholdand/or the second threshold may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to thecell 4706).

The first threshold and/or the second threshold may be BWP-specific. Theone or more messages and/or data packets may indicate a firstBWP-specific threshold and/or a second BWP-specific threshold associatedwith each BWP of the one or more BWPs.

The base station 4704 and/or the wireless device 4702 may activate twoor more BWPs (e.g., two or more active BWPs) of the one or more BWPs.Each of the two or more BWPs that may be activated may be associatedwith a set of resources for RLM.

The wireless device 4702 may select one or more BWPs (e.g., an activeBWP) of the two or more active BWPs for RLM. The active BWP may bedetermined (e.g., selected) by the wireless device 3708 based on one ormore criteria. The wireless device 4702 may perform RLM on the activeBWP. The one or more criteria may comprise one or more of: a BWP index;a numerology index; a service type; an RLM RSs configuration; and/or aPDCCH configuration.

The two or more active BWPs may each be indicated by a BWP index. Thewireless device 4702 may select the active BWP based on the BWP indexesof the two or more active BWPs. The wireless device 4702 may select theactive BWP based on the active BWP having a lowest BWP index of the twoor more active BWPs. The wireless device 4702 may perform RLM on theactive BWP. The active BWP having the lowest BWP index may be a BWP onwhich the wireless device 4702 may receive system information. RLMmonitoring on the active BWP having the lowest BWP index may helpmaintain a non-interrupted link with the base station 4704, for example,to receive the system information. The wireless device 4702 may selectthe active BWP having a highest BWP index of the two or more activeBWPs. The active BWP having the highest BWP index may be a BWP on whichthe wireless device 4702 may receive urgent data packets. RLM monitoringon the active BWP with the highest BWP index may help maintain anon-interrupted link with the base station 4704, for example, to receivethe urgent data packets.

The two or more active BWPs may each be associated with a numerologyindex. The wireless device 4702 may select the active BWP based on thenumerology indexes of the two or more active BWPs. The wireless device4702 may select the active BWP associated with a lowest numerology indexof the two or more active BWPs. The active BWP associated with thelowest numerology index may be a BWP on which the wireless device 4702receives system information and/or paging. RLM monitoring on the activeBWP associated with the lowest numerology index may help maintain arobust link with the base station 4704, for example, to receive systeminformation and/or paging. The wireless device 4702 may select theactive BWP associated with a highest numerology index of the numerologyindexes.

The base station 4704 may transmit a first type of service (e.g., eMBB)on a first active BWP of the two or more active BWPs. The base station4704 may transmit a second type of service (e.g., MTC) on a secondactive BWP of the two or more active BWPs. The first type of service maybe prioritized over the second type of service at the wireless device4702. The wireless device 4702 may select the active BWP with a highestpriority between the first type of service and the second type ofservice.

The first active BWP may be configured with RLM RSs. The second activeBWP may lack configuration with RLM RSs. The wireless device 4702 mayselect the active BWP to be the first active BWP that may be configuredwith RLM RSs.

The first active BWP may be configured with PDCCH resources. The secondactive BWP may lack configuration with PDCCH resources. The wirelessdevice 4702 may select the active BWP to be the first active BWP thatmay be configured with PDCCH resources.

The first active BWP may be configured with common search space forPDCCH monitoring. The second active BWP lack configuration with commonsearch space for PDCCH monitoring. The wireless device may select theactive BWP to be the first active BWP that may be configured with commonsearch space.

The first active BWP may be a primary active BWP. The second active BWPmay be a secondary active BWP. The wireless device 4702 may select theactive BWP to be the primary active BWP. The wireless device may performRLM on the primary active BWP. The primary active BWP may be a BWP onwhich the wireless device 4702, for example: may perform an initialconnection establishment procedure; may initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure; and/or may monitor PDCCH candidates in oneor more common search spaces for DCI formats with CRC scrambled by anSI-RNTI, an RA-RNTI, a TC-RNTI, a P-RNTI, an INT-RNTI, an SFI-RNTI, aTPC-PUSCH-RNTI, a TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, a TPC-SRS-RNTI, a CS-RNTI, anSP-CSI-RNTI, or a C-RNTI. The primary active BWP may be a BWP which maybe maintained in an active state, for example, until switched to anotherBWP by an RRC message. The primary active BWP may be a first BWP in alicensed band. The secondary active BWP may be a second BWP in anunlicensed band. The primary active BWP may be a first BWP used with afirst radio interface (e.g., a Uu interface between a base station and awireless device). The secondary active BWP may be a second BWP used witha second radio interface (e.g., a sidelink interface between a firstwireless device and a second wireless device).

The two or more active BWPs may be grouped into two active BWP groups.The wireless device 4702 may select a first active BWP from a first BWPgroup and a second active BWP from a second BWP group. The first BWPgroup may be in a low frequency (e.g., <6 GHz). The second BWP group maybe in a high frequency (e.g., >6 GHz). The first BWP group may be in alicensed band. The second BWP group may be in an unlicensed band. Thefirst active BWP and the second active BWP may be primary active BWPs.The wireless device 4702 may perform RLM on the first active BWP and thesecond active BWP independently. Monitoring the first active BWP in thelow frequency and the second active BWP in the high frequency may sendvia the higher layer of the wireless device 4702 more radio linkinformation over a wide bandwidth.

The wireless device 4702 may perform RLM on the determined (e.g.,selected) active BWP. RLM may comprise assessing a downlink radio linkquality on the selected active BWP (e.g., the one active BWP). Thedownlink radio link quality may be assessed at least one time perindication period. Assessing a downlink radio link quality on thedetermined (e.g., selected) active BWP may comprise comparing thedownlink radio link quality based on RLM RSs associated with thedetermined (e.g., selected) active BWP over a time period to the firstthreshold and the second threshold. A first BWP (BWP1) may be associatedwith a first RS set for RLM (e.g., RS1, RS2, and RS3). A second BWP(BWP2) may be associated with a second RS set for RLM (e.g., RS2, RS3,RS4, and RS5). A third BWP (BWP3) may be associated with a third RS setfor RLM (e.g., RS5, RS6, . . . RSN). BWP1 and BWP2 may be in activestate. The wireless device 4702 may select an active BWP (e.g., a oneactive BWP) from between BWP1 and BWP2 for RLM, for example, based onthe one or more criteria. The determined (e.g., selected) active BWP maybe BWP1 based on the one or more criteria. The physical layer of thewireless device 4702 may assess a downlink radio link quality of thecell 4706 based on RS1, RS2 and RS3 of BWP1. The downlink radio linkquality of the cell 4706 based on RS1, RS2 and RS3 of BWP1 may becompared, for example, over a time period, to the first threshold andthe second threshold.

FIG. 48 shows an example of RLM on one or more frames and/or subframes.A wireless device 4802 may select BWP1 to perform RLM. The wirelessdevice 4802 may select BWP1 based on one or more criteria. The physicallayer of the wireless device 4802 may indicate a first indication (e.g.,an out-of-sync indication) to the higher layer of the wireless device4802, for example, based on assessing a downlink radio link quality. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 4802 may indicate the firstindication, for example, if a measurement associated with the downlinkradio link quality (e.g., a corresponding BLER) fails to satisfy (e.g.,greater than) the first threshold, for example, in the one or moreframes and/or subframes. The physical layer of the wireless device 4802may indicate a second indication (e.g., an in-sync indication) to thehigher layer of the wireless device 4802 based on the assessing thedownlink radio link quality. The physical layer of the wireless device4802 may indicate the second indication, for example, if a measurementassociated with the downlink radio link quality (e.g., a correspondingBLER) satisfies (e.g., less than) the second threshold.

The wireless device 4802 may start a first timer with a first timervalue (e.g., t310), for example, based on one or more of: receiving afirst quantity (e.g., n310) of consecutive out-of-sync indications forthe cell from and/or via a lower layer (e.g., a physical layer) of thewireless device 4802; and/or a second timer (e.g., t311) not running.The second timer (e.g., t311) may be configured via one or more RRCmessages. The wireless device 4802 may stop the first timer (e.g., t310)for the cell, for example, based on one or more of: receiving a secondquantity (e.g., n311) of consecutive in-sync indications for the cellfrom and/or via the lower layer (e.g., the physical layer) of thewireless devices 4802; and/or the first timer (e.g., t310) running.

The wireless device 4802 may determine an RLF for an MCG, for example,based on the first timer expiring in relation to the cell. The wirelessdevice 4802 may initiate a connection re-establishment procedure, forexample, based on determining the RLF of the MCG. The wireless device4802 may initiate the connection re-establishment procedure based ondetermining the RLF of the MCG, for example, if an AS security isactivated. The wireless device 4802 may perform one or more actions uponleaving RRC_CONNECTED mode. The wireless device 4802 may perform the oneor more actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED mode, for example, if the ASsecurity is not activated.

The wireless device 4802 may determine an RLF for an SCG, for example,based on the first timer expiring in the cell, for example, if the cellis a PSCell. The wireless device 4802 may initiate an SCG failureinformation procedure to report the RLF for the SCG, for example, basedon determining the RLF for the SCG.

The wireless device 4802 may select an active BWP of the two or moreactive BWPs to perform RLM. Inefficiencies of RLM at the wireless device4802 may be reduced by determining (e.g., selecting) the active BWP ofthe two or more active BWPs. Power consumption at the wireless device4802 may be reduced by determining (e.g., selecting) active BWP of thetwo or more active BWPs for RLM.

FIG. 49 shows an example method for determining an RLF. At step 4902, awireless device may receive one or more RRC messages. The one or moreRRC messages may be sent by a base station. The one or more RRC messagesmay comprise configuration parameters of a cell. The cell may compriseone or more BWPs. Each of the one or more BWPs may be indicated by aBWP-specific index. Each BWP of the one or more BWPs may be associatedwith one or more RSs for RLM. The configuration parameters may compriseconfiguration for the one or more BWPs. The configuration parameters maycomprise an RLM configuration for each of the one or more BWPs. At step4904, the wireless device may activate two or more BWPs of the one ormore BWPs. At step 4906, the wireless device may select a BWP of the twoor more BWPs. The wireless device may select the BWP based on one ormore criteria. At step 4908, the wireless device may perform RLM, forexample, based on the one or more RSs associated with the BWP. At step4910, the wireless device may determine an RLF. The RLF may bedetermined based on RLM performed at step 4908.

The one or more RRC messages received at step 4902 may indicate one ormore of a first timer, a first counter, a second counter, a firstthreshold, and/or a second threshold for RLM detection performed at step4908. Activating the two or more BWPs at step 4904 may comprise one ormore of: activating a first BWP of the two or more BWPs at a first slot;and/or monitoring a first PDCCH of the first BWP based on activating thefirst BWP.

Activating the two or more BWPs at step 4904 may further comprise one ormore of: activating a second BWP of the two or more BWPs at a secondslot; and/or monitoring a second PDCCH of the second BWP based onactivating the second BWP. The wireless device may monitor the firstPDCCH of the first BWP for the second BWP based on activating the secondBWP. The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCH of the first BWPfor the second BWP based on activating the second BWP, for example, ifthe second BWP is not configured with PDCCH resource.

The one or more criteria (e.g., for selecting the at least one BWP instep 4906) may be based on a value of a BWP-specific index. Thedetermining (e.g., selecting) at step 4906 may comprise determining(e.g., selecting) a BWP with a lowest BWP-specific index between the twoor more BWPs. The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 4906 maycomprise determining (e.g., selecting) a BWP with a highest BWP-specificindex between the two or more BWPs.

Each of the one or more BWPs may be indicated by a numerology index. Thedetermining (e.g., selecting) at step 4906 may comprise determining(e.g., selecting) a BWP with a lowest numerology index between the twoor more BWPs. The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 4906 maycomprise determining (e.g., selecting) a BWP with a highest numerologyindex between the two or more BWPs.

The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 4906 may comprise determining(e.g., selecting) a primary active BWP from the two or more BWPs. Theprimary active BWP may be a BWP on which the wireless device may performan initial connection establishment procedure. The primary active BWPmay be a BWP on which the wireless device may initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure. The primary active BWP may be a BWP on whichthe wireless device may monitor PDCCH candidates, for example, in one ormore common search spaces for DCI formats with CRC scrambled by anSI-RNTI, an RA-RNTI, a TC-RNTI, a P-RNTI, an INT-RNTI, an SFI-RNTI, aTPC-PUSCH-RNTI, a TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, a TPC-SRS-RNTI, a CS-RNTI, anSP-CSI-RNTI, and/or a C-RNTI. At step 4908, RLM may be performed. TheRLM may comprise one or more of: assessing a downlink radio link qualitybased on the one or more RSs; out-of-sync and/or in-sync indicationsbased on the assessed downlink radio link quality compared to the firstthreshold and/or the second threshold; and/or determining an RLF basedon the out-of-sync and/or the in-sync indications, the first timer, thefirst counter, and/or the second counter.

FIG. 50 shows an example method for a wireless device determining anRLF. The RLF may be based on RLM. The wireless device may determine theRLF autonomously. The wireless device may determine the RLF based on twoor more active BWPs configured in a cell. A base station may be unawareaware of RLM procedures determined by the wireless device. At step 5002,the wireless device may receive one or more messages and/or datapackets. The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise BWPconfiguration parameters. The one or more messages and/or data packetsmay comprise configuration parameters for RLM. At step 5004, two or moreBWPs in the cell may be activated.

At step 5006, the wireless device may determine if a first condition ismet. Determining if the first condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are configured in an unlicensed band and/or if aspeed of RLM is to be increased. The method shown in FIG. 50 may proceedto step 5008 if the first condition is met. At step 5008, the wirelessdevice may perform RLM and/or determine an RLF on two or more activeBWPs, as shown in FIG. 43 and/or FIG. 44. Step 5010 may be performed ifthe first condition is not met.

At step 5010, the wireless device may determine if a second condition ismet. Determining if the second condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are configured in a licensed band and/or if ameasurement accuracy of RLM is to be improved. Step 5012 may beperformed if the second condition is met. At step 5012, the wirelessdevice may perform RLM and/or determine an RLF on two or more activeBWPs as shown in FIG. 45 and/or FIG. 46. Step 5014 may be performed ifthe second condition is not met.

At step 5014, the wireless device may determine if a third condition ismet. Determining if the third condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are in same frequency band, if all active BWPspartially or fully overlap, if all active BWPs have a same service type,and/or if all active BWPs have different service types with one having ahigher priority than any other service type. Step 5016 may be performedif the third condition is met. At step 5016, the wireless device mayperform RLM and/or determine an RLF on a determined (e.g., selected)active BWP, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, 48, and/or FIG. 49.

The steps shown in the method of FIG. 50 may be implemented in any orderand are not limited to the order shown in FIG. 50. For example, step45010 and/or step 5014 may be performed before or after step 5006,and/or step 5014 may be performed before or after step 5006 and/or step5010. The wireless device may determine to perform RLM on the active BWP(e.g., jointly or independently), for example, if the wireless device iscapable of monitoring radio link quality on the active BWP. The wirelessdevice may select (e.g., autonomously select) the active BWP from thetwo or more active BWPs.

A wireless device may be configured to perform some or all of theoperations described herein. The wireless device may be similar to, orthe same as, each of the wireless devices described herein, including,for example, wireless devices 3202, 3302, 3402, 3502, 3602, 3702, 3802,4202, 4302, 4402, 4502, 4602, 4702, and 4802.

Some wireless devices (e.g., wireless devices compatible with LTE,LTE-Advanced, NR, etc.; and/or any other wireless device) may performvarious monitoring in a cell. Such wireless devices may monitor adownlink radio link quality of a cell, such as a PCell or a PSCell. Suchwireless devices (e.g., a physical layer of such wireless devices) maymonitor the downlink radio link quality, for example, for the purpose ofproviding a beam failure indication (BFI) to a higher layer of thewireless device (e.g., a MAC layer or an RRC layer). One or more BWPsmay be configured on the cell. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) and/or receive, one or more message and/or data packets via anactive BWP (e.g., a single active BWP) of the one or more BWPsconfigured on the cell. The other BWPs configured on the cell (e.g.,some or all of the other BWPs configured on the PCell), for example, maybe inactive. The wireless device may monitor the downlink radio linkquality in the active BWP. The wireless device may refrain frommonitoring the downlink radio link quality, for example, in any otherBWPs of the one or more BWPs configured on the cell (e.g., may refrainfrom monitoring in any inactive BWP).

FIG. 51 shows an example configuration of BWPs and corresponding sets ofresources for beam failure detection (BFD). A base station may send(e.g., transmit) one or more messages and/or data packets. The one ormore messages and/or data packets may be received by a wireless device.The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise configurationparameters. The one or more messages and/or data packets may compriseone or more RRC messages (e.g., an RRC connection reconfigurationmessage, an RRC connection reestablishment message, and/or an RRCconnection setup message). The configuration parameters may comprise,for example, BWP configuration parameters for one or more BWPs of a cell5106. The cell 5106 may comprise, for example, a PCell, a PSCell, or anSCell. The one or more BWPs may comprise a first BWP, a second BWP, anda third BWP of the cell 5106.

The configuration parameters may comprise one or more beam failurerecovery (BFR) configuration parameters, for example, for each of theone or more BWPs. The one or more BFR configuration parameters maycomprise a set of one or more RS resource configurations for each BWP ofthe one or more BWPs. Each set of RS resource configurations maycomprise one or more RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) for acorresponding BWP of the one or more BWPs. A first set of RS resourceconfigurations may comprise one or more RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SSblocks) for the first BWP. The wireless device may measure a downlinkradio link quality of one or more first beams associated with the one ormore RSs for the first BWP for beam failure detection (BFD) and/or BFR,for example, for the first BWP and/or the cell 5106.

The one or more BFR configuration parameters may comprise a second setof RS resource configurations comprising one or more second RSs (e.g.,CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) of the first BWP. The wireless device maymeasure a downlink radio link quality of one or more second beamsassociated with the one or more second RSs of the first BWP. A first RSset for BFR may be associated with the first BWP. A second RS set forBFR may be associated with a second BWP. A third RS set for BFR may beassociated with a third BWP. The one or more BFR configurationparameters may comprise one or more BFR request (BFRQ) resources. Theone or more BFR configuration parameters may comprise an associationbetween each of the one or more second RSs and each of the one or moreBFRQ resources.

The first BWP of the cell 5106 may be in active state. The second BWPand the third BWP of the cell 5106 may be in an inactive state. Thewireless device may monitor at least one PDCCH of the first BWP. Atleast one RS (e.g., a DM-RS) of the at least one PDCCH may be associatedwith the one or more first RSs (e.g., QCL-ed). A physical layer of thewireless device may assess a downlink radio link quality of the one ormore first RSs, for example, by comparing a BLER associated with thefirst RSs to a first threshold. The first threshold (e.g., ahypothetical BLER or an L1-RSRP) may be a first threshold value sent bya higher layer of the wireless device (e.g., an RRC layer or a MAClayer).

FIG. 52 shows an example of performing BFD on an active BWP. A wirelessdevice 5202 may monitor a downlink radio link quality on an active BWP(e.g., the first BWP), for example, for BFR. At least some wirelessdevices (e.g., wireless devices compatible with 3GPP Release 15, and/orany other wireless devices) may be configured up to a maximum quantityof resources (e.g., BWPs). Such wireless devices may activate, forexample, one BWP of the maximum quantity of BWPs (e.g., 4 BWPs, 8 BWPs,16 BWPs, etc.) at a time. For such wireless devices (e.g., the wirelessdevice 5202), one BWP (e.g., an uplink BWP and/or a downlink BWP) may beactive in a cell 5206 (e.g., a PCell, an SCell, etc.). If there is oneactive BWP in the cell 5206, the wireless device 5202 may perform BFDand/or BFR for the active BWP. BWPs may have similar channel conditions,such as in high frequencies (e.g., 60 GHz). If there is a beam failureon a first BWP, there may also be a beam failure on a second BWP, forexample, if the first BWP and the second BWP share the same servingbeams and/or channel qualities. The wireless device 5202 may activate atleast two downlink BWPs on the cell 5206, for example, if multipleactive downlink BWPs may be supported for the cell 5206. Monitoring eachactive BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs for BFD may increase thepower and/or battery consumption of the wireless device 5202, forexample, if the at least two downlink BWPs are active.

Detecting a beam failure on one of the BWPs of at least two downlinkBWPs may be sufficient to declare and/or detect a beam failure for atleast two downlink BWPs. A wireless device may reduce power consumptionand/or reduce interference, for example, by performing BFD on one activeBWP of one or more active BWPs, such as using a rule (e.g., a predefinedrule) applied by both the wireless device and a base station, forexample, to select the active BWP for BFD. The rule may comprise one ormore of: select a downlink BWP, among the at least two downlink BWPs,with the lowest/highest BWP index; select a downlink BWP, among the atleast two downlink BWPs, designated as a primary BWP (e.g., default BWP,initial downlink BWP, etc.); select a downlink BWP, among the at leasttwo downlink BWPs, configured with common control/UE-specificchannel(s); select a downlink BWP, among the at least two downlink BWPs,configured with the lowest/highest beam failure detection counter;and/or select a downlink BWP, among the at least two downlink BWPs,configured with the lowest/highest subcarrier spacing.

A first BWP with a high subcarrier spacing (e.g., 60 kHz, 120 kHz) maybe used for a first service (e.g., an URLLC service). A second BWP witha low subcarrier spacing (e.g., 15 kHz, 30 kHz) may be used for a secondservice (e.g., an eMBB service). A wireless device may select a BWPamong the first BWP and the second BWP for beam failure detection, forexample, if the first BWP and the second BWP are active at the same timefor both the first service (e.g., URLLC) and the second service (e.g.,eMBB service). The wireless device may select a BWP among the first BWPand the second BWP, for example depending on the service (or subcarrierspacing). If a first service (e.g., URLLC) is more important for thewireless device and the first service is frequent, the wireless devicemay select the first BWP with the high subcarrier spacing configured forthe first service (e.g., URLLC) which may require more reliabilityand/or robust transmission. If a second service (e.g., eMBB service) isvery frequent and the second service (e.g., URLLC) is infrequent, thewireless device may select the second BWP with the lowest subcarrierspacing configured for the second service (e.g., eMBB service) tosupport high data rate applications (e.g., virtual reality, real-timemonitoring, etc.).

A physical layer of the wireless device 5202 may send a BFI indicationvia a higher layer (e.g., a MAC layer) of the wireless device 5202. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 5202 may send the BFI indication,for example, if the downlink radio link quality (e.g., the BLER, SINR,and/or the L1-RSRP) for the one or more RSs for the first BWP (e.g., aperiodic CSI-RS and/or an SSB) fails to satisfy the first threshold(e.g., if the BLER is greater than a BLER of the first threshold, if theSINR is less than a SINR of the first threshold, and/or the L1-RSRP isless than an L1-RSRP of the first threshold). The wireless device 5202may send the BFI to the higher layer with a periodicity (e.g., sentperiodically according to a period). The periodicity may comprise anyvalue. The periodicity may be determined by the one or more BFRconfiguration parameters. The periodicity may be determined by a maximumbetween a first value (e.g., a shortest periodicity of the one or moreRSs for the first BWP) and a second value (e.g., 2 ms). The second valuemay be configured via the one or more RRC messages.

The physical layer of the wireless device 5202 may refrain from sendinga non-BFI indication to the higher layer of the wireless device 5202,for example, if the downlink radio link quality (e.g., a BLER, SINR,and/or an L1-RSRP) for the one or more RSs of the first BWP (e.g., aperiodic CSI-RS and/or an SSB) satisfies the first threshold (e.g., ifthe BLER is less than the BLER of the first threshold, if the SINR isgreater than the SINR of the first threshold, and/or the L1-RSRP isgreater than the L1-RSRP of the first threshold).

The wireless device 5202 may start and/or restart a first BFD timer(e.g., a beamFailureDetectionTimer) of the first BWP, for example, if aMAC layer of the wireless device 5202 receives a BFI of the first BWPfrom the physical layer of the wireless device 5202. The first BFD timermay be configured via an RRC message (e.g., by one or moreBeamFailureRecoveryConfig parameters associated with an RRC message).The wireless device may increment a first beam failure counter (e.g., aBFI_COUNTER) of the first BWP (e.g., by one unit), for example, based onthe BFI.

The wireless device 5202 may determine a beam failure based on the firstbeam failure counter being equal to or greater than a first number,value, or quantity (e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount value). Thefirst number, value, or quantity may be configured via an RRC message(e.g., by the one or more BeamFailureRecoveryConfig parameters). Thewireless device 5202 may set the first beam failure counter to zero, forexample, if the first BFD timer expires. A second timer of the wirelessdevice 5202 may be configured. The wireless device 5202 may start thesecond timer (e.g., a BFR timer) based on detecting the beam failure.The wireless device 5202 may initiate a random access procedure for BFRbased on the first beam failure counter being equal to or greater thanthe first value.

The random access procedure may comprise a candidate beam identificationprocedure. The candidate beam identification procedure may comprise thewireless device 5202 identifying a first RS in the one or more secondRSs of the first BWP. The first RS may be associated with a BFRQresource of the one or more BFRQ resources. The BFRQ resource maycomprise at least one preamble and/or at least one PRACH resource (e.g.a time and/or a frequency resource). A second downlink radio linkquality (e.g., a BLER, an SINR, and/or an L1-RSRP) for the one or moreRSs for the second BWP (e.g., a periodic CSI-RS and/or an SSB) maysatisfy a second threshold (e.g., if the BLER is greater than a BLER ofthe second threshold, if the SINR is less than a SINR of the secondthreshold, and/or the L1-RSRP is less than an L1-RSRP of the secondthreshold). The second threshold may be a second threshold value sentvia the higher layer of the wireless device 5202 (e.g., an RRC layer ora MAC layer).

The wireless device 5202 may initiate a BFRQ transmission of the randomaccess procedure based on identifying the first RS of the first BWP. TheBFRQ transmission may comprise sending (e.g., transmitting) at least onepreamble via the at least one PRACH resource for the random accessprocedure of the first BWP, for example, in a first slot.

The wireless device 5202 may start monitoring for a BFR response of abase station based on sending the at least one preamble in the firstslot, for example, in a second slot. Monitoring for the BFR response maycomprise monitoring at least one second PDCCH, for example, in one ormore CORESETs associated with the first BWP. Monitoring the at least onesecond PDCCH may comprise monitoring for a first DCI (e.g., a downlinkassignment and/or an uplink grant), for example, within a configuredresponse window. The first DCI may comprise a CRC scrambled by a C-RNTIof the wireless device 5202. The one or more CORESETs may be configuredby the one or more BFR configuration parameters. The random accessprocedure for a BFR procedure may be successfully completed based onreceiving the first DCI on the at least one second PDCCH in the one ormore CORESETs, for example, within the configured response window.

A cell may be configured with one or more active BWPs. The wirelessdevice may perform BFD on an active BWP (e.g., a single active BWP) ofthe one or more active BWPs. Power consumption of the wireless devicemay increase, for example, if the wireless device performs BFD on morethan one active BWPs (e.g., on all of the active BWPs). The wirelessdevice may select (e.g., autonomously select) an active BWP from the oneor more active BWPs. Measurement accuracy for BFD may be reduced, forexample, if the wireless device performs BFD on the active BWPdetermined (e.g., selected) autonomously by the wireless device, forexample, without a knowing a basis for determining (e.g., selecting) theactive BWP by the wireless device.

A wireless device may perform BFD for each active BWP separately. A basestation may be configured with two or more active BWPs (e.g., a firstactive BWP and a second active BWP). The wireless device may perform afirst BFD for the first active BWP. The wireless device may perform asecond BFD for the second active BWP. The wireless device may determinea beam failure based on either the first BFD or the second BFD.

A wireless device may perform BFD for each active BWP jointly (e.g.,together). A base station may be configured with two or more active BWPs(e.g., a first active BWP and a second active BWP). The wireless devicemay perform BFD on the first active BWP and the second active BWPjointly. The wireless device may determine a beam failure based on theBFD.

A wireless device may perform BFD on an active BWP (e.g., a singleactive BWP) of the two or more active BWPs. The active BWP may bedetermined (e.g., selected) based on one or more criteria. The activeBWP determined (e.g., selected) may be aligned between the wirelessdevice and a base station based on one or more rules.

A base station may communicate with a wireless device on two or moreactive BWPs in a cell (e.g., a PCell, a PSCell, an SCell, or any othercell type). The one or more active BWPs may each be a downlink BWP. Thebase station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more types of dataservices via different active BWPs in parallel (e.g., simultaneouslyand/or overlapped in time). The wireless device may receive the one ormore types of data services via different active BWPs in parallel (e.g.,simultaneously and/or overlapped in time). The wireless device mayperform BFR, for example, if the one or more active BWPs are in anactive state in the cell. The wireless device may be unable to determinehow to perform a BFR operation (e.g., a BFI indication, a BFD, and/or aBFR) on the cell, for example, if one or more active BWPs overlap intime in the cell. The wireless device may be unable to determine how toselect a single active BWP from the one or more active BWPs to performthe BFR operation. The wireless device may be unable to determine how tosend a BFI indication based on downlink radio link qualities on the twoor more active BWPs, for example, if the wireless device is capable ofperforming BFR operations on the two or more active BWPs in parallel.FIGS. 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, and 60 show BFR on a cell (e.g., aPCell, a PSCell, an SCell, or any other cell type) by a wireless device,for example, if the cell is configured with two or more active BWPs.

FIG. 53 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for BFD. BFD may be performed on atleast two active BWPs separately. A base station 5304 may send (e.g.,transmit), to a wireless device 5302, one or more messages and/or datapackets. The wireless device 5302 may receive the one or more messagesand/or data packets. The one or more messages and/or data packets maycomprise configuration parameters of a cell 5306. The configurationparameters may comprise BWP configuration parameters for one or moreBWPs. The one or more BWPs may comprise a first BWP, a second BWP, and athird BWP. The first BWP may be an active BWP. The second BWP may be anactive BWP. The third BWP may be an inactive BWP. The configurationparameters may comprise one or more BFR configuration parameters (e.g.,one or more BeamFailureRecoveryConfig parameters) for each BWP of theone or more BWPs (e.g., for each of the first BWP and the second BWP).

The one or more BFR configuration parameters may comprise a set ofBWP-specific RS resource configurations for each BWP of the one or moreBWPs. A first set of BWP-specific RS resource configurations for thefirst BWP may comprise one or more first RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SSblocks) of the first BWP. A second set of BWP-specific RS resourceconfigurations for the second BWP may comprise one or more second RSs(e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) of the second BWP. The one or more firstRSs may be BFR RSs of the first BWP (e.g., a first RS set for BFR). Theone or more second RSs may be BFR RSs of the second BWP (e.g., a secondRS set for BFR).

Each BWP of the one or more BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specificBFI counter (e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount). The BWP-specific BFIcounter may be configured by the one or more BFR configurationparameters. The first BWP may be configured with a first BWP-specificBFI counter. The second BWP may be configured with a second BWP-specificBFI counter.

The one or more BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific BFI counter(e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount). The BWP-specific BFI counter maybe configured by the one or more BFR configuration parameters. TheBWP-specific BFI counter may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to thecell 3318).

Each BWP of the one or more BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specificBFD timer (e.g., a beamFailureDetectionTimer). The BWP-specific BFDtimer may be configured by the one or more BFR configuration parameters.The first BWP may be configured with a first BWP-specific BFD timer. Thesecond BWP may be configured with a second BWP-specific BFD timer.

The one or more BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific BFD timer(e.g., the beamFailureDetectionTimer). The BWP-specific BFD timer may beconfigured by the one or more BFR configuration parameters. TheBWP-specific BFD timer may be cell specific (e.g., specific to the cell5306).

The base station 5304 and/or the wireless device 5302 may activate twoor more BWPs (e.g., two or more active BWPs) of the one or more BWPs.The two or more active BWPs may comprise a first active BWP and a secondactive BWP. Activating two or more BWPs may comprise activating thefirst active BWP of the two or more active BWPs in a first slot and/oractivating the second active BWP of the two or more active BWPs in asecond slot.

Each active BWP of the two or more active BWPs may be associated with aset of BWP-specific RS resources for a BFR operation. The BFR operationmay comprise a BFI indication, BFD, and/or BFR. A first set ofBWP-specific RS resources for the first BWP may comprise one or morefirst RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) of the first BWP. A second setof BWP-specific RS resources for the second BWP may comprise one or moresecond RSs (e.g., CSI-RS and/or SS blocks) of the second BWP.

The wireless device 5302 may perform a BFR operation on each of the twoor more active BWPs in the cell 5306. A BFR operation may compriseassessing a downlink radio link quality on each of the two or moreactive BWPs (e.g., the first active BWP and the second active BWP).Assessing a downlink radio link quality may comprise evaluating thedownlink radio link quality based on comparing a set of BWP-specificresources associated with a BWP, for example, over a time period, to athreshold. The threshold (e.g. a hypothetical BLER or an L1-RSRP) may bea value sent via a higher layer (e.g., an RRC layer or a MAC layer) ofthe wireless device 3314. The threshold may be BWP-specific. Thethreshold may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to the cell 5306).

The wireless device 5302 may monitor at least one PDCCH of the firstBWP. At least one first RS (e.g., a DM-RS) of the at least one PDCCH maybe associated with the one or more first RSs (e.g., QCL-ed). Thephysical layer of the wireless device 5302 may assess a first downlinkradio link quality of the one or more first RSs, for example, bycomparing the first downlink radio link quality with a first threshold.The wireless device 5302 may monitor at least one second PDCCH of thesecond BWP. At least one second RS (e.g., a DM-RS) of the at least onesecond PDCCH may be associated with the one or more second RSs (e.g.,QCL-ed). The physical layer of the wireless device 5302 may assess asecond downlink radio link quality of the one or more second RSs by, forexample, comparing the second downlink radio link quality with a secondthreshold. The first threshold (e.g., a hypothetical BLER or an L1-RSRP)may be a value sent via the higher layer of the wireless device 5302(e.g., the RRC layer or the MAC layer). The second threshold (e.g., ahypothetical BLER or an L1-RSRP) may be a second threshold value sentvia the higher layer of the wireless device 5302 (e.g., the RRC layer orthe MAC layer).

The physical layer of the wireless device 5302 may send a BFIindication, for example, if the downlink radio link quality (e.g., theBLER, SINR, or the L1-RSRP), for example, based on the set ofBWP-specific resources (e.g., the periodic CSI-RS or the SSB) of the twoor more active BWPs fails to satisfy the threshold (e.g., if the BLER isgreater than a BLER of the threshold, if the SINR is less than a SINR ofthe threshold, and/or the L1-RSRP is less than an L1-RSRP of thethreshold). The physical layer of the wireless device 5302 may send theBFI indication via the higher layer (e.g., the MAC layer) of thewireless device 5302. The wireless device 5302 may send the BFIindication to the higher layer with a BWP-specific periodicity (e.g.,sent periodically according to a period). The BWP-specific periodicitymay be any value. The BWP-specific periodicity may be determined by amaximum value between a shortest periodicity of the set of BWP-specificresources and a third value (e.g., 2 ms). The third value may beconfigured by the configuration parameters.

The physical layer of the wireless device 5302 may send a first BFIindication for the first BWP via the higher layer (e.g., the MAC layer),for example, if the first downlink radio link quality (e.g., the BLER,SINR, or the L-RSRP), for example, based on the set of firstBWP-specific resources of a BWP of the two or more active BWPs, fails tosatisfy the first threshold (e.g., if the BLER is greater than a BLER ofthe first threshold, if the SINR is less than a SINR of the firstthreshold, and/or the L1-RSRP is less than an L1-RSRP of the firstthreshold). The wireless device 5302 may send the first BFI indicationto the higher layer with a first BWP-specific periodicity (e.g.,periodically sent according to a period). The first BWP-specificperiodicity may be any value. The first BWP-specific periodicity may bedetermined by a maximum value between a shortest periodicity of thefirst set of BWP-specific resources and a fourth value (e.g., 2 ms). Thefourth value may be configured by the configuration parameters.Performing a first BFR operation on the first BWP of the at least twoBWPs may be independent of performing a second BFR operation on thesecond BWP of the at least two BWPs.

The wireless device 5302 may start and/or restart a BWP-specific BFDtimer (e.g., a beamFailureDetectionTimer), for example, if the higherlayer of the wireless device 5302 receives a BFI indication from a BWPof the two or more active BWPs (e.g., the first BWP or the second BWP).The higher layer of the wireless device 5302 may receive the BFIindication from the physical layer of the wireless device 5302. Thewireless device may increment a beam failure counter (e.g., aBFI_COUNTER) of the BWP (e.g., by one unit) associated with the BFIindication.

The wireless device 5302 may determine a beam failure of the BWP basedon the beam failure counter being equal to or greater than aBWP-specific BFI counter of the BWP. The wireless device 5302 may setthe beam failure counter to zero, for example, if the BWP-specific BFDtimer of the BWP expires. The wireless device 5302 may comprise a secondtimer (e.g., a BFR timer). The wireless device 5302 may start the secondtimer based on detecting the beam failure of the BWP.

The wireless device may start and/or restart a first BWP-specific BFDtimer (e.g., a beamFailureDetectionTimer) of the first BWP, for example,if a higher layer of the wireless device 5302 receives the first BFIindication of the first BWP. The higher layer of the wireless device5302 may receive the first BFI indication of the first BWP from thephysical layer of the wireless device 5302. The wireless device 5302 mayincrement a first beam failure counter (e.g., a BFI_COUNTER) of thefirst BWP (e.g., by one unit).

The wireless device 5302 may determine a first beam failure of the firstBWP based on the first beam failure counter being equal to or greaterthan the first BWP-specific BFI counter. The wireless device may set thefirst beam failure counter to zero, for example, if the firstBWP-specific BFD timer expires. The wireless device 5302 may initiate arandom access procedure for a BFR of the cell 5306 based on determininga beam failure of a BWP.

The higher layer of the wireless device 5302 may determine a beamfailure based on the first BFI indication of the first BWP and thesecond BFI indication of the second BWP. A BWP-specific beam failurecounter (e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount) may be configured for thecell 5306 and/or for each BWP.

The cell 5306 may be associated with one or more RSs (e.g., RS1, RS2, .. . , RSN) and one or more BWPs (e.g., BWP1, BWP2 and BWP3, . . . ).BWP1 may be associated with RS1, RS2 and RS3, for example, for a BFRoperation. BWP2 may be associated with RS2, RS3, RS4 and RS5, forexample, for a BFR operation. BWP3 may be associated with RS5, RS6, . .. , RSN. The wireless device 5302 may perform a first BFR operationbased on RS1, RS2 and RS3 and/or may perform a second BFR operationbased on RS2, RS3, RS4 and RS5 on BWP2, for example, if BWP1 and BWP2are in an active state.

FIG. 54 shows an example of performing BFD on two or more active BWPsseparately. BFR operation may be performed on one or more frames and/orsubframes. The physical layer of the wireless device 5402 may send afirst BFI indication with a first BWP-specific periodicity (e.g.,periodically based on a period of any value) on a first active BWP. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 5402 may send the first BFIindication via the higher layer of the wireless device 5402 (e.g., theMAC layer and/or the RRC layer). The physical layer of the wirelessdevice 5402 may send a second BFI indication with a second BWP-specificperiodicity (e.g., periodically based on a period of any value) on asecond active BWP. The physical layer of the wireless device 5402 maysend the second BFI indication via the higher layer of the wirelessdevice 5402.

The wireless device 5402 may assess downlink radio link quality of twoor more active BWPs in the cell. The wireless device 5402 may determinea beam failure based on downlink radio link qualities of the two or moreactive BWPs. Measurement results of downlink radio link quality may bemore accurate based on the two or more active BWPs compared tomeasurement results of downlink radio link quality on a single activeBWP. Unnecessary BFD may be avoided and/or declaration of beam failuremay be avoided, for example, if the wireless device 5402 assessesdownlink radio link quality of the two or more active BWPs in the cell.

Providing BFI indications on two or more active BWPs with one or moredifferent periodicities may be inefficient. Managing a firstBWP-specific BFD timer (e.g., a beamFailureDetectionTimer), a firstBWP-specific BFI counter (e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount), a secondBWP-specific BFD timer, and/or a second BWP-specific BFI counter, forexample, in a higher layer of the wireless device 5402 may be difficultto implement.

FIG. 55 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for BFD. BFD may be performed on two ormore active BWPs jointly. The wireless device 5502 may send one or moreBFIs efficiently, for example, based on two or more active BWPs.Inefficiencies associated with providing the one or more BFIs may bereduced, for example, by the wireless device 5502. A base station 5504may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device 5502, one or moremessages and/or data packets. The wireless device 5502 may receive theone or more messages. The one or more messages and/or data packets maycomprise configuration parameters of a cell 5506. The cell 5506 maycomprise a PCell. The cell 5506 may comprise a PSCell of an SCG, forexample, if the cell 5506 comprises the SCG. The cell 5506 may comprisean SCell or any other cell type. The configuration parameters mayindicate the cell 5506 comprises one or more BWPs. The configurationparameters may indicate a set of resources (e.g., RSs) on at least oneBWP of the one or more BWPs for a BFR operation. The set of resourcesmay be indicated by a set of resources indexes. The set of resources maybe a subset of one or more SS/PBCH blocks and/or one or more CSI-RSresources. The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicate oneor more thresholds comprising a first threshold for evaluating thedownlink radio link quality of the cell 5506.

The base station 5504 and/or the wireless device 5502 may activate atleast two BWPs of the one or more BWPs (e.g., BWP1 and BWP2). Each ofthe at least two BWPs may be associated with a set of resources for BFDand BFR.

The wireless device 5502 may perform a BFR operation on the at least twoBWPs based on the at least two BWPs being in an active state in thecell. The BFR operation may comprise assessing at least one time per anindication period a downlink radio link quality on the at least twoBWPs. Assessing a downlink radio link quality on the at least two BWPsmay comprise comparing on one or more sets of resources associated withthe at least two active BWPs, for example, over a time period, to athreshold. The threshold (e.g., a hypothetical BLER or an L1-RSRP) maybe a value sent by the higher layer (e.g., the RRC or the MAC layer) ofthe wireless device 5502. The threshold may be BWP-specific. Thethreshold may be cell-specific (e.g., specific to the cell 5506).

The cell 5506 may be associated with one or more RSs (e.g., RS1, RS2, .. . , RSN) and one or more BWPs (e.g., BWP1, BWP2 and BWP3, . . . ).BWP1 may be associated with a first set of BWP-specific RS resources(RS1, RS2, and RS3) for a first BFR operation. BWP2 may be associatedwith a second set of BWP-specific RS resources (RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5)for a second BFR operation. BWP1 and BWP2 may be in an active state. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 5502 may assess a downlink radiolink quality of the cell 5506 based on one or more sets of RSscomprising the first set of BWP-specific RS resources and the second setof BWP-specific RS resources. The one or more sets of RSs may compriseRS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5. The physical layer of the wireless device5502 may assess the downlink radio link quality of the cell 5506 basedon the one or more sets of RSs, for example, over a time period, bycomparison with a threshold.

The physical layer of the wireless device 5502 may send a BFI indicationvia the higher layer of the wireless device 5502 based on the downlinkradio link quality assessed. The downlink radio link quality may beassessed based on the one or more sets of RSs. The physical layer of thewireless device 5502 may send the BFI indication, for example, if thedownlink radio link quality fails to satisfy the threshold, for example,in one or more frames and/or subframes. The wireless device 5502 mayperform a BFR operation of the cell 5506, for example, jointly on two ormore active BWPs (e.g., the BWP1 and the BWP2). The wireless device 5502may initiate a random access procedure for BFR based on a number of theBFI indications equaling or exceeding a BWP-specific BFI counter (e.g.,a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount).

The BWP-specific BFI counter may be configured for the cell 5506. TheBWP-specific BFI counter may be configured for each BWP. The first BWP(e.g., BWP1) may be configured with a first BWP-specific BFI counter.The second BWP (e.g., BWP2) may be configured with a second BWP-specificBFI counter.

A BWP-specific BFI counter of an active BWP may be used in a BFRoperation, for example, if one or more active BWPs are in the cell 5506.A maximum BWP-specific BFI counter of the one or more active BWPs may beused for a BFR operation, for example, if two or more active BWPs are inthe cell 5506.

A minimum BWP-specific BFI counter of the two or more active BWPs may beused for a BFR operation, for example, if there are two or more activeBWPs in the cell 5506. The minimum BWP-specific BFI counter may enable afaster BFR operation.

FIG. 56 shows an example of performing BFD jointly on two or more activeBWPs. A wireless device 5602 may perform the BFR operation jointly onBWP1 and BWP2, for example, using one or more frames and/or subframes3602. The physical layer of the wireless device 5602 may send a BFIindication based on the BFR operation, for example, periodically (e.g.,based on an indication period) on the one or more frames and/orsubframes. The physical layer of the wireless device 5602 may performthe BFR operation based on one or more sets of RSs of BWP1 and BWP2. Thephysical layer of the wireless device 5602 may indicate the BFIindication to the higher layer of the wireless device 5602 (e.g., theMAC layer or the RRC layer). The higher layer of the wireless device5602 may determine a beam failure based on a quantity of the BFIindications. The higher layer of the wireless device 5602 may determinea beam failure, for example, if the quantity of BFI indications equalsor is greater than the BWP-specific BFI counter

The physical layer of wireless device 5602 may send to the higher layerof the wireless device 5602 a BFI indication periodically (e.g., basedon the indication period). The BFI indication may be based on a BFRoperation on one or more sets of RSs of two or more active BWPs.Inefficiencies of providing a BFI indication to the higher layer of thewireless device 5602 may be reduced by performing the BFR operation onone or more sets of RSs of the two or more active BWPs. Inefficienciesof determining a beam failure may be reduced. A higher layer of thewireless device 5602 may reuse BFD resources to support one or moreactive BWPs in the cell, for example, by performing the BFR operation onthe one or more sets of RSs of the two or more active BWPs.

A first downlink radio link quality on a first active BWP of the one ormore active BWPs may be similar as a second downlink radio link qualityon a second active BWP of the one or more active BWPs. Power consumptionof the wireless device may be increased by performing a BFR operation onthe one or more active BWPs independently or jointly.

FIG. 57 shows an example configuration of two or more active BWPs andcorresponding sets of resources for BFD. BFD may be performed on aselected active BWP. A wireless device 5702 may perform BFD on theselected active BWP using reduced power consumption. The wireless device5702 may use reduced power consumption, for example, by determining(e.g., selecting) the selected active BWP from two or more active BWPsand/or performing a BFR operation on the selected active BWP of the twoor more active BWPs. A base station 5704 may send (e.g., transmit), tothe wireless device 5702, one or more messages and/or data packets. Thewireless device 5702 may receive the one or more messages and/or datapackets. The one or more messages and/or data packets may compriseconfiguration parameters of a cell 5706. The cell 5706 may be a PCell.The cell 5706 may be a PSCell of an SCG, for example, if the cell 5706comprise the SCG. The cell 5706 may be an SCell or any other cell type.

The configuration parameters may indicate the cell 5706 comprises one ormore BWPs. The configuration parameters may indicate a set of resources(e.g., RSs) on at least one BWP of the one or more BWPs for a BFRoperation. The set of resources may be indicated by a set of resourcesindexes. The set of resources may be a subset of one or more SS/PBCHblocks and/or one or more CSI-RS resources.

The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicate one or morethresholds comprising a first threshold for evaluating a downlink radiolink quality of the cell. The first threshold may be cell specific(e.g., specific to the cell 5706). The first threshold may beBWP-specific. The one or more messages and/or data packets may indicatea first BWP-specific threshold associated with each BWP of the one ormore BWPs.

The base station 5704 and/or the wireless device 5702 may activate twoor more BWPs of the one or more BWPs (e.g., the BWP1 and the BWP2). Eachof the two or more BWPs may be associated with a set of resources forBFR.

The wireless device may select an active BWP (e.g., a selected oneactive BWP) of the two or more BWPs based on one or more criteria. Thewireless device may perform a BFR operation on the active BWP determined(e.g., selected) based on the one or more criteria. The one or morecriteria may comprise at least one of: a BWP index; a numerology index;a service type; a BFR RSs configuration; and/or a PDCCH configuration.

Each of the two or more BWPs may be indicated by a BWP index. Thewireless device 5702 may select the active BWP of the two or more BWPswith a lowest BWP index between the two or more BWPs. The wirelessdevice 5702 may perform a BFR operation on the active BWP. The BWP withthe lowest BWP index may be a BWP on which the wireless device 5702receives system information. Monitoring on the BWP with the lowest BWPindex may help maintain a non-interrupted link for receiving systeminformation, for example, from base station 5704. The wireless device5702 may select the active BWP with a highest BWP index of the two ormore BWPs. The active BWP with the highest BWP index may be a BWP onwhich the wireless device 5702 receives urgent data packets. Monitoringon the active BWP with the highest BWP index may help maintain anon-interrupted link for receiving urgent data packets, for example,from the base station 5704.

Each of the two or more BWPs may be associated with a numerology index.The wireless device 5702 may select the active BWP of the two or moreBWPs with a lowest numerology index between the two or more BWPs. Theactive BWP with the lowest numerology index may be a BWP on which thewireless device 5702 receives system information and/or paging.Monitoring on the active BWP with the lowest numerology index may helpmaintain robust link for receiving system information and/or paging, forexample, from the base station 5704. The wireless device 5702 may selectthe active BWP of the two or more BWPs with a highest numerology indexbetween the two or more BWPs. The wireless device may perform a BFRoperation on the active BWP.

Each of the two or more BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific beamfailure maximum counter (e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount). Thewireless device 5702 may select the active BWP of the two or more BWPswith a lowest BWP-specific beam failure maximum counter between the twoor more BWPs. A BFR operation may be performed faster, based on theactive BWP with the lowest BWP-specific beam failure maximum counter. Arobust link with the base station 5704 may be faster, based onmonitoring on the active BWP with the lowest BWP-specific beam failuremaximum counter. The wireless device 5702 may select the active BWP ofthe two or more BWPs with a highest BWP-specific beam failure maximumcounter between the two or more BWPs. The wireless device may perform aBFR operation on the determined (e.g., selected) BWP.

The base station 5704 may transmit a first type of service (e.g., eMBB)on a first active BWP of the two or more active BWPs. The base station5704 may transmit a second type of service (e.g., MTC) on a secondactive BWP of the two or more active BWPs. The first type of service maybe prioritized over the second type of service at the wireless device5702. The wireless device 5702 may select the active BWP from the firstactive BWP and the second active BWP based on a type of service with ahighest priority between the first type of service and the second typeof service.

The first active BWP may be configured with BFR RSs. The second activeBWP may lack a configuration with BFR RSs. The wireless device 5702 mayselect the active BWP to be the first active BWP that may be configuredwith BFR RSs. The first active BWP may be configured with PDCCHresources. The second active BWP may lack a configuration with PDCCHresources. The wireless device 5702 may select the active BWP to be thefirst active BWP that may be configured with PDCCH resources. The firstactive BWP may be configured with common search space for PDCCHmonitoring. The second active BWP may lack a configuration with commonsearch space for PDCCH monitoring. The wireless device may select theactive BWP to be the first active BWP that may be configured with commonsearch space.

The first active BWP may be a primary active BWP. The second active BWPmay be a secondary active BWP. The wireless device 5702 may select theactive BWP to be the primary active BWP. The wireless device may performa BFR operation on the primary active BWP. The primary active BWP may bea BWP on which the wireless device 5702, for example: may perform aninitial connection establishment procedure; may initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure; and/or may monitor PDCCH candidates in oneor more common search spaces for DCI formats with CRC scrambled by anSI-RNTI, an RA-RNTI, a TC-RNTI, a P-RNTI, an INT-RNTI, an SFI-RNTI, aTPC-PUSCH-RNTI, a TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, a TPC-SRS-RNTI, a CS-RNTI, anSP-CSI-RNTI, and/or a C-RNTI. The primary active BWP may be a BWP whichmay be maintained in an active state. The primary active BWP may be aBWP which may be maintained in an active state, for example, untilswitched to another BWP by an RRC message. The primary active BWP may bea first BWP in a licensed band. The secondary active BWP may be a secondBWP in an unlicensed band. The primary active BWP may be a first BWPused with a first radio interface (e.g., a Uu interface between a basestation and a wireless device). The secondary active BWP may be a secondBWP used with a second radio interface (e.g., a sidelink interfacebetween a first wireless device and a second wireless device).

The two or more active BWPs may be grouped into two active BWP groups.The wireless device 5702 may select a first active BWP from a first BWPgroup and a second active BWP from a second BWP group. The first BWPgroup may be in a low frequency (e.g., <6 GHz). The second BWP group maybe in a high frequency (e.g., >6 GHz). The first BWP group may be in alicensed band. The second BWP group may be in an unlicensed band. Thefirst active BWP and the second active BWP may be primary active BWPs.The wireless device 3714 may perform a BFR operation on the first activeBWP and the second active BWP independently. Monitoring the first activeBWP in the low frequency and the second active BWP in the high frequencymay provide the higher layer of the wireless device 5702 more radio linkinformation over a wide bandwidth.

The wireless device 5702 may perform a BFR operation on the active BWP(e.g., the active BWP determined (e.g., selected) from the two or moreactive BWPs). The BFR operation may comprise assessing downlink a radiolink quality on the BWP, for example, determined (e.g., selected) basedon one or more criteria. The downlink radio link quality may be assessedat least one time per indication period. Assessing downlink radio linkquality on the determined (e.g., selected) active BWP may compriseevaluating the downlink radio link quality based on BFR RSs associatedwith the at least one BWP, over a time period, by comparison with thethreshold. BWP1 may be associated with the first RS set for BFR (e.g.,RS1, RS2, and RS3). BWP2 may be associated with the second RS set forBFR (e.g., RS2, RS3, RS4, and RS5). BWP3 may be associated with thethird RS set for BFR (e.g., RS5, RS6, . . . RSN). BWP1 and BWP2 may bein an active state. The wireless device 5702 may select an active BWPfrom between BWP1 and BWP2 for a BFR operation, for example, based onthe one or more criteria. The active BWP may be BWP1 based on the one ormore criteria. The physical layer of the wireless device 5702 may assessa downlink radio link quality of the cell 5706 based on RS1, RS2 and RS3of BWP1. The physical layer of the wireless device 5702 may assess thedownlink radio link quality of the cell 5706 based on RS 1, RS2 and RS3of BWP1, over a time period, by comparison with the threshold.

FIG. 58 shows an example of performing BFD on a determined (e.g.,selected) active BWP. BFD and/or BFR may be performed using one or moreframes and/or subframes. A wireless device 5802 may select BWP1 toperform a BFR operation based on the one or more criteria. The physicallayer of the wireless device 5802 may send a BFI indication via thehigher layer of the wireless device 5802 based on the BFR operationperiodically (e.g., based on an indication period) on the one or moreframes and/or subframes.

The wireless device 5802 may determine a beam failure based on a firstbeam failure counter of the BWP1 being equal to or greater than a firstvalue (e.g., a beamFailureInstanceMaxCount). The first number may beconfigured by RRC (e.g., by BeamFailureRecoveryConfig). The wirelessdevice may initiate a random access procedure for a BFR based on thefirst beam failure counter being equal to or greater than the firstnumber.

The wireless device 5802 may select an active BWP of the two or moreactive BWPs to perform a BFR operation. Inefficiencies of the BFRoperation at the wireless device 5802 may be reduced by determining(e.g., selecting) an active BWP of two or more BWPs. Power consumptionat the wireless device 5802 may be reduced by determining (e.g.,selecting) the active BWP of the two or more BWPs for the BFR operation.Speed of the BFR operation at the wireless device 5802 may be increasedby determining (e.g., selecting) the active BWP of the two or moreactive BWPs.

FIG. 59 shows an example method for determining a beam failure. At step5902, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messages. The one ormore RRC messages may be received from a base station. The one or moreRRC message may comprise configuration parameters of a cell. The cellmay comprise one or more BWPs. Each BWP of the one or more BWPs may beindicated by a BWP-specific index. Each BWP of the one or more BWPs maybe associated with one or more RSs, for example, for a BFR operation.The BFR operation may comprise at least one of a BFI indication, BFD,BFR request transmission, and/or BFR request response reception.

At step 5904, the wireless device may activate two or more BWPs of theone or more of BWPs. At step 5906, the wireless device may select a BWPof the two or more BWPs based on one or more criteria. At step 5908, thewireless device may perform the BFR operation based on the one or moreRSs associated with the active BWP. At step 5910, the wireless devicemay determine a beam failure. The beam failure may be determined basedon the BFR operation performed at step 5908. At step 5912, the wirelessdevice may initiate a BFR procedure.

The one or more RRC messages received at step 5902 may indicate at leastone of a first timer, a first counter, a second counter, a firstthreshold, and/or a second threshold for a BFR operation (e.g., the BFRoperation performed at step 5908). Activating the two or more BWPs atstep 5904 may comprise at least one of: activating a first BWP of thetwo or more BWPs at a first slot; and/or monitoring a first PDCCH of thefirst BWP based on activating the first BWP.

Activating the two or more BWPs at step 5904 may comprise at least oneof: activating a second BWP of the two or more BWPs at a second slot;and/or monitoring a second PDCCH of the second BWP based on activatingthe second BWP. The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCH of thefirst BWP for the second BWP based on activating the second BWP, forexample, if the second BWP lacks configuration with PDCCH resource.

The one or more criteria may be based on a value of a BWP-specificindex. The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 5906 may comprisedetermining (e.g., selecting) a BWP with a lowest BWP-specific indexbetween the two or more BWPs. The determining (e.g., selecting) at step5906 may comprise determining (e.g., selecting) a BWP with a highestBWP-specific index between the two or more BWPs.

Each BWP of the one or more BWPs may be configured by (or may beassociated with) a BWP-specific beam failure maximum counter (e.g., abeamFailureInstanceMaxCount). The one or more criteria may be based on avalue of the BWP-specific beam failure maximum counter. The determining(e.g., selecting) at step 5906 may comprise determining (e.g.,selecting) a BWP with a lowest BWP-specific beam failure maximum counterbetween the two or more BWPs. The determining (e.g., selecting) at step5906 may comprise determining (e.g., selecting) a BWP with a highestBWP-specific beam failure maximum counter between the two or more BWPs.

The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 5906 may comprise determining(e.g., selecting) a BWP with a lowest numerology index between the twoor more BWPs. The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 5906 maycomprise determining (e.g., selecting) a BWP with a highest numerologyindex between the two or more BWPs.

The determining (e.g., selecting) at step 5906 may comprise determining(e.g., selecting) a primary active BWP from the two or more BWPs. Theprimary active BWP may be a BWP on which the wireless device may performan initial connection establishment procedure, may initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure, and/or may monitor PDCCH candidates in oneor more common search spaces for DCI formats with CRC scrambled by anSI-RNTI, an RA-RNTI, a TC-RNTI, a P-RNTI, an INT-RNTI, an SFI-RNTI, aTPC-PUSCH-RNTI, a TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, a TPC-SRS-RNTI, a CS-RNTI, anSP-CSI-RNTI, and/or a C-RNTI.

FIG. 60 shows an example method for a wireless device determining a beamfailure. A wireless device may autonomously determine a BFR operation.The wireless device may determine the BFR operation with two or moreactive BWPs configured in a cell. A base station may be unaware of theBFR operation determined by the wireless device. At step 6002, thewireless device may receive one or more messages and/or data packets.The one or more messages and/or data packets may comprise BWPconfiguration parameters. The one or more messages and/or data packetsmay comprise configuration parameters for BFD. At step 6004, two or moreBWPs in the cell may be activated.

At step 6006, the wireless device may determine if a first condition ismet. Determining if the first condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are configured in an unlicensed band and/or if aspeed of BFD is to be increased. Step 6008 may be performed if the firstcondition is met. At step 6008, the wireless device may perform BFD onthe two or more active BWPs, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 and/orFIG. 54. Step 6010 may be performed if the first condition is not met.

At step 6010, the wireless device may determine if a second condition ismet. Determining if the second condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs are configured in a licensed band and/or if ameasurement accuracy of BFD may be improved and/or if a robustness ofBFD may be improved. Step 6012 may be performed if the second conditionis met. At step 6012, the wireless device may perform BFD on two or moreactive BWPs, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 and/or FIG. 56. Step 5014may be performed if the second condition is not met.

At step 6014, the wireless device may determine if a third condition ismet. Determining if the third condition is met may comprise determiningif all active BWPs have a similar channel quality (e.g., operateintra-band). Step 6016 may be performed if the second condition is met.At step 6016, the wireless device may perform BFD on a determined (e.g.,selected) active BWP, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, 58, and/or FIG.59.

The steps shown in the method of FIG. 60 may be implemented in any orderand are not limited to the order shown in FIG. 60. The wireless devicemay determine a BFR operation to perform on two or more active BWPs, forexample, if the wireless device is capable of monitoring radio linkquality on the two or more active BWPs. The wireless device maydetermine performing a BFR operation on an active BWP (e.g., jointly orindependently), for example, if the wireless device is capable ofmonitoring radio link quality on the active BWP. The wireless device mayautonomously select the active BWP from the two or more active BWPs.

A wireless device may be configured to perform some or all of theoperations described herein. The wireless device may be similar to, orthe same as, each of the wireless devices described herein, including,for example, wireless devices 3202, 3302, 3402, 3502, 3602, 3702, 3802,4202, 4302, 4402, 4502, 4602, 4702, 4802, 5202, 5302, 5402, 5502, 5602,5702, and 5802.

A wireless device may receive configuration parameters for a firstbandwidth part (BWP) of a cell and for a second BWP of the cell, mayactivate the first BWP and the second BWP, may select, based on a firstdownlink control channel configuration of the first BWP and a seconddownlink control channel configuration of the second BWP, a BWP, of thefirst BWP and the second BWP, for radio link monitoring for the cell,may measure, during a time period that the first BWP and the second BWPare active, one or more reference signals associated with the determined(e.g., selected) BWP for the radio link monitoring for the cell, maydetermine, based on the measuring, a radio link failure for the cell,and/or may initiate, based on the radio link failure for the cell, aconnection re-establishment procedure. The wireless device may determinethe BWP for the radio link monitoring for the cell is further based on afirst radio interface type on the first BWP and/or a second radiointerface type on the second BWP. The first downlink control channelconfiguration of the first BWP and the at least a second downlinkcontrol channel configuration of the second BWP may comprise a first BWPindex of the first BWP and a second BWP index of the second BWP, a firstnumerology index of the first BWP and a second numerology index of thesecond BWP, a first service type on the first BWP and a second servicetype on the second BWP, and/or a radio link monitoring reference signalconfiguration. The wireless device may initiate the connectionre-establishment procedure by sending a preamble associated with arandom access procedure. The wireless device may initiate the connectionre-establishment procedure by determining (e.g., selecting) a new cellbased on a cell selection procedure and/or by sending, based on the newcell, a preamble associated with a random access procedure. The one ormore reference signals associated with the determined (e.g., selected)BWP may comprise at least one of a synchronization signal block and/or achannel state information reference signal. The configuration parametersmay comprise a first reference signal associated with the first BWPand/or a second reference signal associated with the second BWP. Thecell may a primary cell and/or a primary secondary cell. The BWP for theradio link monitoring of the cell may comprise be determined based onthe determined (e.g., selected) BWP being configured with downlinkcontrol channel resources, the determined (e.g., selected) BWP beingconfigured with a common search space set for downlink channelmonitoring, and/or the determined (e.g., selected) BWP being configuredwith reference signals for radio link monitoring. The wireless devicemay monitor, based on the activating the first BWP, a first downlinkcontrol channel on the first BWP for first downlink control informationindicating resource allocation of the first BWP and/or monitor, based onthe activating the second BWP, a second downlink control channel on thesecond BWP for second downlink control information indicating resourceallocation of the second BWP. The wireless device may determine whethera radio link quality of the cell for a time period satisfies a firstthreshold associated with a first block error rate and/or a secondthreshold associated with a second block error rate. The wireless devicemay determine at least one first indication, based on a radio linkquality not satisfying a first threshold and/or at least one secondindication, based on the radio link quality satisfying a secondthreshold. The wireless device may determine a radio link failure eventhas occurred, based on a first quantity of the at least one firstindications and/or a radio link failure event has not occurred, based ona second quantity of the at least one second indications. The radio linkfailure may not be detected (e.g., the wireless device may refrain fromdetecting or not be able to detect the RLF), based on a BWP which maynot be determined. The wireless device may determine the BWP by notselecting, among the first BWP and the second BWP, a BWP that is notconfigured with downlink control channel resources. The wireless devicemay determine the BWP by selecting, among the first BWP and the secondBWP, a BWP that may be configured with a common search space set fordownlink control channel monitoring. The wireless device may determinethe BWP by not selecting, among the first BWP and the second BWP, a BWPthat may not be configured with a common search space set for downlinkcontrol channel monitoring. The wireless device may determine the BWP byselecting, among the first BWP and the second BWP, a BWP configured withreference signals for radio link monitoring. The wireless device maydetermine the BWP by not selecting, among the first BWP and the secondBWP, a BWP that may not be configured with reference signals for radiolink monitoring. The wireless device may activate the first BWP and thesecond BWP by: activating the first BWP at a first time interval, andactivating the second BWP at a second time interval. The wireless devicemay activate the first BWP based on or in response to receiving at leastone of: a first command indicating an activation of the first BWP, or asecond command indicating switching an active BWP to the first BWP. Thewireless device may activate the second BWP based on or in response toreceiving at least one of: a first command indicating an activation ofthe second BWP, or a second command indicating switching an active BWPto the second BWP. The wireless device may monitor, based on or inresponse to activating the second BWP, a downlink control channel on thesecond BWP for a downlink control information indicating resourceallocation of the second BWP. The wireless device may detect the radiolink failure for the cell based on a first quantity of the firstindications. The first quantity may be configured in a radio resourcecontrol message. The wireless device may refrain from detecting (e.g.,may not detect) the radio link failure for the cell based on a secondquantity of the second indications. The second quantity may beconfigured in the radio resource control message

A wireless device may receive configuration parameters for a firstbandwidth part (BWP) of a cell and for a second BWP of the cell, mayactivate the first BWP and the second BWP, may select, based on a firstradio interface type associated with the first BWP and a second radiointerface type associated with the second BWP, a BWP, of the first BWPand the second BWP, for radio link monitoring for the cell, may measure,during a time period that the first BWP and the second BWP are active,one or more reference signals associated with the determined (e.g.,selected) BWP for the radio link monitoring for the cell, may determine,based on the measuring, a radio link failure for the cell, and/or mayinitiate, based on the radio link failure for the cell, a connectionre-establishment procedure. The first radio interface type associatedwith the first BWP may comprise an Uu radio interface between a basestation and the wireless device and/or a sidelink radio interfacebetween the wireless device and a second wireless device. The secondradio interface type associated with the second BWP may comprise an Uuradio interface between a base station and the wireless device and/or asidelink radio interface between the wireless device and a secondwireless device. The wireless device may determine the BWP for the radiolink monitoring for the cell is further based on the BWP comprising a Uuradio interface type. The wireless device may activate the first BWP andthe second BWP by activating the first BWP at a first time intervaland/or activating the second BWP at a second time interval, that atleast partially overlaps with the first time interval. The wirelessdevice may determine the BWP by refraining from selecting (e.g., notselecting), among the first BWP and the second BWP, a BWP without an Uuradio interface type. The wireless device may activate the first BWP andthe second BWP by: activating the first BWP at a first time interval,and/or activating the second BWP at a second time interval.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore messages comprising configuration parameters of a first bandwidthpart (BWP) of a cell and a second BWP of the cell. The configurationparameters may indicate at least one of: first plurality of referencesignals for/of the first BWP, and/or second plurality of referencesignals for/of the second BWP. The wireless device may activate thefirst BWP and the second BWP. The wireless device may measure, for radiolink monitoring of the cell, the first plurality of reference signalsand the second plurality of reference signals. The wireless device maydetect, based on the radio link monitoring, a radio link failure for thecell. The wireless device may initiate, in response to detecting theradio link failure, a connection re-establishment procedure.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore messages comprising configuration parameters of a first bandwidthpart (BWP) of a cell and a second BWP of the cell. The configurationparameters may indicate at least one of: a first plurality of referencesignals associated with the first BWP, and/or a second plurality ofreference signals associated with the second BWP. The wireless devicemay activate the first BWP and the second BWP. The wireless device maymeasure, for a first radio link monitoring for the cell, the firstplurality of reference signals. The wireless device may measure, for asecond radio link monitoring for the cell, the second plurality ofreference signals. The wireless device may detect, based on the firstradio link monitoring and the second radio link monitoring, a radio linkfailure for the cell. The wireless device may initiate, based on or inresponse to detecting the radio link failure, a connectionre-establishment procedure.

A wireless device may receive configuration parameters for a firstbandwidth part (BWP of a cell and for a second BWP of the cell, mayactivate activating the first BWP and the second BWP, may select, basedon one or more criteria, a BWP for radio link monitoring for the cell,wherein the one or more criteria comprises a first BWP index of thefirst BWP and a second BWP index of the second BWP, a first numerologyindex of the first BWP and a second numerology index of the second BWP,a first service type on the first BWP and a second service type on thesecond BWP, and a radio link monitoring reference signal configuration,may measure, during a time period that the first BWP and the second BWPare active, one or more reference signals associated with the determined(e.g., selected) BWP, may determine, based on the measuring, a radiolink failure for the cell, and/or may initiate, based the radio linkfailure for the cell, a connection re-establishment procedure. Thewireless device may select the BWP for the radio link monitoring for thecell is further based on the determined (e.g., selected) BWP beingconfigured with downlink control channel resources, the determined(e.g., selected) BWP being configured with a common search space set fordownlink channel monitoring, and/or the determined (e.g., selected) BWPbeing configured with reference signals for radio link monitoring. Thedetermined (e.g., selected) BWP may be configured with downlink controlchannel resources and/or a common search space for downlink controlchannel monitoring. The configuration parameters may indicate a firstreference signal associated with the first BWP and a second referencesignal associated with the second BWP.

A wireless device may receive one or more configuration parameters of acell, may activate activating at least two downlink bandwidth parts(BWPs) of a plurality of downlink BWPs for the cell, wherein each of theplurality of downlink BWPs is associated with a respective set of one ormore reference signals for beam failure detection, may measure, for beamfailure detection, the respective set of one or more reference signalsof a first downlink BWP of the plurality of downlink BWPs, and/or maydetermine, based on the measuring, a beam failure for the at least twodownlink BWPs. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate afirst set of one or more reference signals for a beam failure detectionassociated with the first downlink BWP and/or a second set of one ormore reference signals for a beam failure detection associated with asecond downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs. The wirelessdevice may measure the respective sets of one or more reference signalsassociated with first the downlink BWP is based on the activating theleast two downlink BWPs for the cell. The wireless device may determinethe beam failure for the at least two downlink BWPs is based on a beamfailure detection of a first downlink BWP of the at least two downlinkBWPs and/or a beam failure detection of a second downlink BWP of the atleast two downlink BWPs. The plurality of downlink BWPs may be in one ofan active state and an inactive state. An active state of a firstdownlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs may comprise monitoring adownlink control channel of the first downlink BWP. Each of theplurality of downlink BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific index.The wireless device may determine the first downlink BWP, of the atleast two downlink BWPs, based on a BWP-specific index among at leasttwo BWP-specific indexes associated with the at least two downlink BWPs,a determination that the first downlink BWP is a primary BWP, aBWP-specific numerology, a BWP-specific beam failure counter, and/or aBWP-specific type of service. The wireless device may determine adownlink BWP, of the at least two downlink BWPs, that is a primary BWP.The wireless device may measure the respective set of one or morereference signals associated with the first downlink BWP by determiningwhether a radio link quality of the respective set of one or morereference signals associated with the first downlink BWP satisfies athreshold. The wireless device may determine the beam failure for the atleast two downlink BWPs is further based on the radio link quality notsatisfying the threshold. The wireless device may refrain fromperforming (e.g., may not perform) beam failure detection by measuringthe respective set of one or more reference signals of a second downlinkBWP of the at least two downlink BWPs. The second downlink BWP may bedifferent from the downlink BWP. The inactive state of a first downlinkBWP may comprise refraining from monitoring (e.g., not monitoring) adownlink control channel of the first downlink BWP. The wireless devicemay activate the at least two downlink BWPs by: activating a firstdownlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs in a first slot, and/oractivating a second downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs in asecond slot. The wireless device may determine the downlink BWP bydetermining a downlink BWP with a highest BWP specific index among atleast two BWP specific indexes of the at least two downlink BWPs. Eachof the plurality of downlink BWPs may be associated with a BWP specificnumerology. The wireless device may determine a downlink BWP bydetermining a downlink BWP with a lowest BWP specific numerology amongat least two BWP specific numerologies of the at least two downlinkBWPs. The wireless device may determine a downlink BWP by determining adownlink BWP with a highest BWP specific numerology among at least twoBWP specific numerologies of the at least two downlink BWPs. Each of theplurality of downlink BWPs may be associated with a BWP specific beamfailure counter. The wireless device may determine the downlink BWP bydetermining a downlink BWP with a lowest BWP specific beam failurecounter among at least two BWP specific beam failure counters of the atleast two downlink BWPs. The wireless device may determine the downlinkBWP by determining a downlink BWP with a highest BWP specific beamfailure counter among at least two BWP specific beam failure counters ofthe at least two downlink BWPs. Each of the plurality of downlink BWPsmay be associated with a BWP specific type of service. The wirelessdevice may determine the downlink BWP by determining a downlink BWP witha BWP specific type of service having a highest priority among at leasttwo BWP specific type of services of the at least two downlink BWPs.

A wireless device may receive one or more configuration parameters for afirst downlink bandwidth part (BWP) of a cell and for a second downlinkBWP of the cell. The or more configuration parameters may indicate afirst set of one or more reference signals for a beam failure detectionassociated with the first downlink BWP and/or a second set of one ormore reference signals for a beam failure detection associated with thesecond downlink BWP, may activate the first downlink BWP and the seconddownlink BWP, may measure, for beam failure detection and based on theactivating, the first set of one or more reference signals and thesecond set of one or more reference signals, and/or may determine, basedon the measuring, a beam failure for the cell. Each of the firstdownlink BWP and the second downlink BWP may be in one of an activestate and an inactive state. An active state of the first downlink BWPmay comprise monitoring a downlink control channel of the first downlinkBWP. Each of the first downlink BWP and the second downlink BWP may beassociated with a BWP-specific index. The wireless device may determinethe beam failure for the cell is further based on a radio link qualitynot satisfying a threshold.

A wireless device may receive one or more configuration parameters for afirst downlink bandwidth part (BWP) of a cell and/or for a seconddownlink BWP of the cell. The one or more configuration parameters mayindicate a first set of one or more reference signals for a beam failuredetection associated with the first downlink BWP and/or a second set ofone or more reference signals for a beam failure detection associatedwith the second downlink BWP. The wireless device may activate the firstdownlink BWP and the second downlink BWP, and based on the activating,perform beam failure detection of the cell that may comprise beamfailure detection of the first downlink BWP and/or the beam failuredetection associated with the second downlink BWP. The wireless devicemay determine, based on the beam failure detection of the cell, aninstance of a beam failure for the cell. Each of the first downlink BWPand the second downlink BWP may be in one of an active state and aninactive state. An active state of the first downlink BWP may comprisemonitoring a downlink control channel of the first downlink BWP. Each ofthe first downlink BWP and the second downlink BWP is associated with aBWP-specific index.

FIG. 61 shows example elements of a computing device that may be used toimplement any of the various devices described herein, including, e.g.,the base station 120A and/or 120B, the wireless device 110 (e.g., 110Aand/or 110B), or any other base station, wireless device, or computingdevice described herein. The computing device 6100 may include one ormore processors 6101, which may execute instructions stored in therandom access memory (RAM) 6103, the removable media 6104 (such as aUniversal Serial Bus (USB) drive, compact disk (CD) or digital versatiledisk (DVD), or floppy disk drive), or any other desired storage medium.Instructions may also be stored in an attached (or internal) hard drive6105. The computing device 6100 may also include a security processor(not shown), which may execute instructions of one or more computerprograms to monitor the processes executing on the processor 6101 andany process that requests access to any hardware and/or softwarecomponents of the computing device 6100 (e.g., ROM 6102, RAM 6103, theremovable media 6104, the hard drive 6105, the device controller 6107, anetwork interface 6109, a GPS 6111, a Bluetooth interface 6112, a WiFiinterface 6113, etc.). The computing device 6100 may include one or moreoutput devices, such as the display 6106 (e.g., a screen, a displaydevice, a monitor, a television, etc.), and may include one or moreoutput device controllers 6107, such as a video processor. There mayalso be one or more user input devices 6108, such as a remote control,keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, etc. The computing device6100 may also include one or more network interfaces, such as a networkinterface 6109, which may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, ora combination of the two. The network interface 6109 may provide aninterface for the computing device 6100 to communicate with a network6110 (e.g., a RAN, or any other network). The network interface 6109 mayinclude a modem (e.g., a cable modem), and the external network 6110 mayinclude communication links, an external network, an in-home network, aprovider's wireless, coaxial, fiber, or hybrid fiber/coaxialdistribution system (e.g., a DOCSIS network), or any other desirednetwork. Additionally, the computing device 6100 may include alocation-detecting device, such as a global positioning system (GPS)microprocessor 6111, which may be configured to receive and processglobal positioning signals and determine, with possible assistance froman external server and antenna, a geographic position of the computingdevice 6100.

The example in FIG. 61 may be a hardware configuration, although thecomponents shown may be implemented as software as well. Modificationsmay be made to add, remove, combine, divide, etc. components of thecomputing device 6100 as desired. Additionally, the components may beimplemented using basic computing devices and components, and the samecomponents (e.g., processor 6101, ROM storage 6102, display 6106, etc.)may be used to implement any of the other computing devices andcomponents described herein. For example, the various componentsdescribed herein may be implemented using computing devices havingcomponents such as a processor executing computer-executableinstructions stored on a computer-readable medium, as shown in FIG. 61.Some or all of the entities described herein may be software based, andmay co-exist in a common physical platform (e.g., a requesting entitymay be a separate software process and program from a dependent entity,both of which may be executed as software on a common computing device).

The disclosed mechanisms herein may be performed if certain criteria aremet, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radioenvironment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like.Example criteria may be based on, for example, wireless device and/ornetwork node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packetsizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or thelike. If the one or more criteria are met, various examples may be used.It may be possible to implement examples that selectively implementdisclosed protocols.

A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wirelessdevices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/ormultiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have somespecific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/orcapability(ies). A base station may comprise multiple sectors. A basestation communicating with a plurality of wireless devices may refer tobase station communicating with a subset of the total wireless devicesin a coverage area. Wireless devices referred to herein may correspondto a plurality of wireless devices of a particular LTE or 5G releasewith a given capability and in a given sector of a base station. Aplurality of wireless devices may refer to a selected plurality ofwireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in acoverage area. Such devices may operate, function, and/or perform basedon or according to drawings and/or descriptions herein, and/or the like.There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wirelessdevices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosedmethods, for example, because those wireless devices and/or basestations perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.

One or more features described herein may be implemented in acomputer-usable data and/or computer-executable instructions, such as inone or more program modules, executed by one or more computers or otherdevices. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects,components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks orimplement particular abstract data types when executed by a processor ina computer or other data processing device. The computer executableinstructions may be stored on one or more computer readable media suchas a hard disk, optical disk, removable storage media, solid statememory, RAM, etc. The functionality of the program modules may becombined or distributed as desired. The functionality may be implementedin whole or in part in firmware or hardware equivalents such asintegrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), and thelike. Particular data structures may be used to more effectivelyimplement one or more features described herein, and such datastructures are contemplated within the scope of computer executableinstructions and computer-usable data described herein.

Many of the elements in examples may be implemented as modules. A modulemay be an isolatable element that performs a defined function and has adefined interface to other elements. The modules may be implemented inhardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware(i.e., hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, allof which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may beimplemented as a software routine written in a computer languageconfigured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++,Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulationprogram such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or LabVIEWMathScript.Additionally or alternatively, it may be possible to implement modulesusing physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmableanalog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmablehardware may comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors,application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmablegate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs).Computers, microcontrollers, and microprocessors may be programmed usinglanguages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs, and CPLDsmay be programmed using hardware description languages (HDL), such asVHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog, which mayconfigure connections between internal hardware modules with lesserfunctionality on a programmable device. The above-mentioned technologiesmay be used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.

A non-transitory tangible computer readable media may compriseinstructions executable by one or more processors configured to causeoperations of multi-carrier communications described herein. An articleof manufacture may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readablemachine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon forenabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g., a wirelessdevice, wireless communicator, a wireless device, a base station, andthe like) to allow operation of multi-carrier communications describedherein. The device, or one or more devices such as in a system, mayinclude one or more processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like.Other examples may comprise communication networks comprising devicessuch as base stations, wireless devices or user equipment (wirelessdevice), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like. A network maycomprise any wireless technology, including but not limited to,cellular, wireless, WiFi, 4G, 5G, any generation of 3GPP or othercellular standard or recommendation, wireless local area networks,wireless personal area networks, wireless ad hoc networks, wirelessmetropolitan area networks, wireless wide area networks, global areanetworks, space networks, and any other network using wirelesscommunications. Any device (e.g., a wireless device, a base station, orany other device) or combination of devices may be used to perform anycombination of one or more of steps described herein, including, forexample, any complementary step or steps of one or more of the abovesteps.

Although examples are described above, features and/or steps of thoseexamples may be combined, divided, omitted, rearranged, revised, and/oraugmented in any desired manner. Various alterations, modifications, andimprovements will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Suchalterations, modifications, and improvements are intended to be part ofthis description, though not expressly stated herein, and are intendedto be within the spirit and scope of the descriptions herein.Accordingly, the foregoing description is by way of example only, and isnot limiting.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wirelessdevice, configuration parameters of a cell, wherein the cell comprises afirst bandwidth part (BWP) and a second BWP; activating the first BWPand the second BWP; determining, based on a first downlink controlchannel configuration of the first BWP and a second downlink controlchannel configuration of the second BWP, a BWP, of the first BWP and thesecond BWP, for radio link monitoring for the cell; measuring, during atime period that the first BWP and the second BWP are active, one ormore reference signals associated with the determined BWP; determining,based on the measuring, a radio link failure for the cell; andinitiating, based on the radio link failure for the cell, a connectionre-establishment procedure.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein thedetermining the BWP for the radio link monitoring for the cell isfurther based on: a first radio interface type on the first BWP; and asecond radio interface type on the second BWP.
 3. The method of claim 1,wherein the first downlink control channel configuration of the firstBWP and the second downlink control channel configuration of the secondBWP comprises at least one of: a first BWP index of the first BWP and asecond BWP index of the second BWP; a first numerology index of thefirst BWP and a second numerology index of the second BWP; a firstservice type on the first BWP and a second service type on the secondBWP; or a radio link monitoring reference signal configuration.
 4. Themethod of claim 1, wherein the initiating the connectionre-establishment procedure comprises sending a preamble associated witha random access procedure.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein the one ormore reference signals associated with the determined BWP comprise atleast one of: a synchronization signal block; or a channel stateinformation reference signal.
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein theconfiguration parameters indicate at least one of: a first referencesignal associated with the first BWP; and a second reference signalassociated with the second BWP.
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein thecell comprises at least one of: a primary cell; or a primary secondarycell.
 8. The method of claim 1, wherein the determining the BWP forradio link monitoring for the cell is further based on at least one of:the determined BWP being configured with downlink control channelresources; the determined BWP being configured with a common searchspace set for downlink channel monitoring; or the determined BWP beingconfigured with reference signals for radio link monitoring.
 9. Themethod of claim 1, further comprising: monitoring, based on theactivating the first BWP, a first downlink control channel on the firstBWP for first downlink control information indicating resourceallocation of the first BWP; and monitoring, based on the activating thesecond BWP, a second downlink control channel on the second BWP forsecond downlink control information indicating resource allocation ofthe second BWP.
 10. The method of claim 1, further comprisingdetermining whether a radio link quality of the cell for a time periodsatisfies: a first threshold associated with a first block error rate;and a second threshold associated with a second block error rate. 11.The method of claim 1, further comprising: determining at least one of:at least one first indication, based on a radio link quality notsatisfying a first threshold; or at least one second indication, basedon the radio link quality satisfying a second threshold; and determiningat least one of: a radio link failure event has occurred, based on afirst quantity of the at least one first indications; or a radio linkfailure event has not occurred, based on a second quantity of the atleast one second indications.
 12. A method comprising: receiving, by awireless device, configuration parameters for a first bandwidth part(BWP) of a cell and for a second BWP of the cell; activating the firstBWP and the second BWP; determining, based on a first radio interfacetype associated with the first BWP and a second radio interface typeassociated with the second BWP, a BWP, of the first BWP and the secondBWP, for radio link monitoring for the cell; measuring, during a timeperiod that the first BWP and the second BWP are active, one or morereference signals associated with the determined BWP; determining, basedon the measuring, a radio link failure for the cell; and sending, basedon the radio link failure for the cell, a preamble associated with arandom access procedure.
 13. The method of claim 12, wherein the firstradio interface type associated with the first BWP comprises at leastone of: an Uu radio interface between a base station and the wirelessdevice; and a sidelink radio interface between the wireless device and asecond wireless device.
 14. The method of claim 13, wherein the secondradio interface type associated with the second BWP comprises at leastone of: an Uu radio interface between a base station and the wirelessdevice; and a sidelink radio interface between the wireless device and asecond wireless device.
 15. The method of claim 12, wherein thedetermining the BWP for the radio link monitoring for the cell isfurther based on the BWP comprising a Uu radio interface type.
 16. Themethod of claim 12, wherein the activating the first BWP and the secondBWP comprises: activating the first BWP at a first time interval; andactivating the second BWP at a second time interval that at leastpartially overlaps with the first time interval.
 17. A methodcomprising: receiving, by a wireless device, configuration parametersfor a first bandwidth part (BWP) of a cell and for a second BWP of thecell; activating the first BWP and the second BWP; determining, based onone or more criteria, a BWP for radio link monitoring for the cell,wherein the one or more criteria comprises at least one of: a first BWPindex of the first BWP and a second BWP index of the second BWP; a firstnumerology index of the first BWP and a second numerology index of thesecond BWP; a first service type on the first BWP and a second servicetype on the second BWP; or a radio link monitoring reference signalconfiguration; measuring, during a time period that the first BWP andthe second BWP are active, one or more reference signals associated withthe determined BWP; determining, based on the measuring, a radio linkfailure for the cell; and sending, based on the radio link failure forthe cell, a preamble associated with a random access procedure.
 18. Themethod of claim 17, wherein the determining is further based on at leastone of: the determined BWP being configured with downlink controlchannel resources; the determined BWP being configured with a commonsearch space set for downlink channel monitoring; or the determined BWPbeing configured with reference signals for radio link monitoring. 19.The method of claim 17, wherein the determined BWP is configured with atleast one of: downlink control channel resources; or a common searchspace for downlink control channel monitoring.
 20. The method of claim17, wherein the configuration parameters indicate at least one of: afirst reference signal associated with the first BWP; and a secondreference signal associated with the second BWP.